9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT and 675xi Series Phones t1 SIP IIP PHONE SI 41-001160-03 Rev 00 D ra f Administrator Guide Release 2.
t1 ra f D Aastra Telecom will not accept liability for any damages and/or long distance charges, which result from unauthorized and/or unlawful use. While every effort has been made to ensure accuracy, Aastra Telecom will not be liable for technical or editorial errors or omissions contained within this documentation. The information contained in this documentation is subject to change without notice. Copyright 2008 Aastra Telecom. www.aastratelecom.com All Rights Reserved.
Software License Agreement t1 Aastra Telecom Inc., hereinafter known as "Seller", grants to Customer a personal, worldwide, non-transferable, non-sublicenseable and non-exclusive, restricted use license to use Software in object form solely with the Equipment for which the Software was intended. This Product may integrate programs, licensed to Aastra by third party Suppliers, for distribution under the terms of this agreement.
t1 ra f D
Third Party Copyright Compliance This product contains software provided under license to Aastra Telecom by one or more third parties. In addition to the Aastra SLA shown above, use and distribution of this product is subject to the following license terms: Expat XML Parser t1 Copyright (c) 1998, 1999, 2000 Thai Open Source Software Center Ltd and Clark Cooper Copyright (c) 2001, 2002, 2003, 2004, 2005, 2006 Expat maintainers.
M5T SIP Stack - M5T Portions of this software are © 1997 - 2006 M5T a Division of Media5 Corporation ("M5T( tm )"). All intellectual property rights in such portions of the software and documentation are owned by M5T and are protected by Canadian copyright laws, other applicable copyright laws and international treaty provisions. M5T and its suppliers retain all rights not expressly granted. MD5 RSA ra f t1 Copyright (C) 1991-2, RSA Data Security, Inc. Created 1991. All rights reserved.
OpenSSL License D ra f t1 /* ============================================================ * Copyright (c) 1998-2007 The OpenSSL Project. All rights reserved. * * Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without * modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions * are met: * * 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright * notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. * * 2.
D ra f t1 * "This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project * for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit (http://www.openssl.org/)" * * THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT ``AS IS'' AND ANY * EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR * PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED.
D ra f t1 * the following conditions are aheared to. The following conditions * apply to all code found in this distribution, be it the RC4, RSA, * lhash, DES, etc., code; not just the SSL code. The SSL documentation * included with this distribution is covered by the same copyright terms * except that the holder is Tim Hudson (tjh@cryptsoft.com). * * Copyright remains Eric Young's, and as such any Copyright notices in * the code are not to be removed.
D ra f t1 * IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE * ARE DISCLAIMED.
libSRTP (SRTP) - Cisco Copyright (c) 2001-2005 Cisco Systems, Inc. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer.
Wind River Systems - VxWorks software D UPnP - Intel ra f t1 The VxWorks Run-Time software module is Copyright (c) WindRiver Systems Inc, all rights reserved. It is licensed for use, not sold.
1. You may not copy, modify, rent, sell, distribute or transfer any part of the Software except as provided in this Agreement, and you agree to prevent unauthorized copying of the Software. 2. You may not reverse engineer, decompile, or disassemble the Software. 3. You may not sublicense the Software. 4. The Software may include portions offered on terms in addition to those set out here, as set out in a license accompanying those portions. t1 OWNERSHIP OF SOFTWARE AND COPYRIGHTS.
LIMITATION OF LIABILITY FOR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONSEQUENTIAL OR INCIDENTAL DAMAGES, SO THE ABOVE LIMITATION MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. YOU MAY ALSO HAVE OTHER LEGAL RIGHTS THAT VARY FROM JURISDICTION TO JURISDICTION. TERMINATION OF THIS AGREEMENT. Intel may terminate this Agreement at any time if you violate its terms. Upon termination, you will immediately destroy the Software or return all copies of the Software to Intel. APPLICABLE LAWS.
Software License Agreement iii Third Party Copyright Compliance v Expat XML Parser ....................................................................................................1-v . M5T SIP Stack - M5T .............................................................................................. 1-vi . MD5 RSA ................................................................................................................ 1-vi . OpenSSL ...........................................................
Contents Model 6755i IP Phone ............................................................................................1-23 Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ...................................................................1-27 . . Firmware Installation Information .................................................................................1-33 . Description .............................................................................................................1-33 .
Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys ......................................3-72 . Contents Action URI ..............................................................................................................3-73 . Configuration Server Settings ................................................................................3-75 . Firmware Update Features ....................................................................................3-84 . TLS Support .........................
Live Dial Pad* .........................................................................................................5-33 Contents . Language ...............................................................................................................5-34 . Locking IP Phone Keys ..........................................................................................5-49 . Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) .......................................5-50 . Local Dial Plan ........
Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) .....................................5-188 ACD Subscription Period .....................................................................................5-198 BLA Subscription Period ......................................................................................5-200 Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) ............................5-202 . Contents Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) ................
Update Caller ID During a Call .................................................................................6-8 Contents . Boot Sequence Recovery Mode ..............................................................................6-9 . Auto-discovery Using mDNS ..................................................................................6-10 . Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) ............................................6-11 . Missed Call Summary Subscription ............
Contents Chapter 9 Troubleshooting . About this chapter ...........................................................................................................9-1 Troubleshooting ..............................................................................................................9-3 . . Log Settings .............................................................................................................9-3 . Module/Debug Level Settings ...............................................
Local SIP TLS Port ................................................................................................ A-32 Contents . HTTPS Client and Server Settings ........................................................................ A-33 . HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings ....................................................... A-35 . UPnP Settings ....................................................................................................... A-37 .
Action URI Settings ............................................................................................. A-135 . Contents XML SIP Notify Settings ...................................................................................... A-141 . Polling Action URI Settings ................................................................................. A-142 . Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings ............................................................ A-143 .
Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) ....................................................... A-229 Contents . Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys ....................................... A-230 . BLF List URI Settings .......................................................................................... A-230 . Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display ........................................... A-231 . Expansion Module 1 through 3 ....................................
6757i CT Sample Configuration File ..................................................................... C-12 . Contents 6753i Sample Configuration File ........................................................................... C-29 . Appendix D Sample BLF Softkey Settings About this appendix ....................................................................................................... D-1 . . Sample BLF Softkey Settings ......................................................................
Non-Blocking HTTP Connections ......................................................................... F-90 . XML SIP Notify ...................................................................................................... F-91 . Limited Warranty D ra f t1 .
Preface About this guide Introduction t1 This SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide provides information on the basic network setup, operation, and maintenance of the IP phones, Models 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT and the 675xi Series IP Phones (6751i, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT). It also includes details on the functioning and configuration of the IP phones.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this guide Other Documentation The IP phone documentation consists of: SIP IP Phone Installation Guide – contains installation and set-up instructions, information on general features and functions, and basic options list customization. Included with the phone.
Chapters and appendixes in this guide This guide contains the following chapters and appendixes: Go to An overview of the IP Phones and the IP Phone firmware installation information Chapter 1 IP Phone interface methods Chapter 2 Administrator options information Chapter 3 Configuring the Network and Global SIP Features on the IP Phone Chapter 4 Configuring operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 5 Configuring advanced operational information on the IP Phones Chapter 6 Encryption infor
t1 ra f D
Chapter 1 Overview About this chapter Introduction Topics ra f t1 This chapter briefly describes the IP Phone Models, and provides information about installing the IP phone firmware. It also describes the firmware and configuration files that the IP phone models use for operation.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page Firmware and Configuration Files page 1-36 page 1-38 Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files page 1-39 D ra f t1 Configuration File Precedence 1-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Overview IP Phone Models IP Phone Models Description All Aastra SIP IP Phone Models communicate over an IP network allowing you to receive and place calls in the same manner as a regular business telephone. All phone models support the Session Initiation Protocol (SIP). The 9480i CT and 6757i CT offers the base phone along with a cordless extension. References For more information about the features and installation requirements, see the SIP IP Phone Installation Guide for your specific model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6753i 6751i t1 6757i CT 6755i ra f 6757i Optional Accessories D The following are optional accessories for the IP Phones. Power over Ethernet (PoE) Inline Power Injector 1-4 Additional Ethernet Cable (category 5/5e straight through cable) 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Overview IP Phone Models A Power over Ethernet (PoE) inline power injector supplies 48V power to the IP phone through the Ethernet cable on pins 4 & 5 and 7 & 8. Warning: Do not use this inline PoE power injector to power other devices. See your phone-specific Installation Guide for more information. Reference D ra f t1 For more information about installing the PoE and additional Ethernet cable, see your phone-specific Installation Guide.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Model 9143i IP Phone This section provides brief information about the Model 9143i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 9143i.
Overview IP Phone Models 9143i Symbol Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Line/Call Appearance key - Connects you to a line or call. The Aastra 9143i IP Phone supports up to 3 line keys. L1 L2 L3 L4 Directory key - Accesses the Directory on the phone. The Directory List is your personal phone book, conveniently stored within your phone. You can enter up to 200 entries into the 9143i Directory by adding them manually, or by saving the number and name from other lists stored on your phone.
Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Programmable keys - Allows you to use the feature configured for that key. You can program up to 7 keys with a specific function. By default, there are no functions configured on the programmable keys (keys are configured as “None”).
Model 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones This section provides brief information about the Models 9480i and 9480i CT IP Phones. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on these models.
Overview IP Phone Models 9480i and 9480i CT Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Good oodbye Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Options Hold key - Places an active call on hold.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
Overview IP Phone Models 9480i CT Cordless Handset Features 5 line backlit display screen 2 multi-functional softkeys Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions Vibration Alerter Headset Jack Desk charging stand D ra f t1 • • • • • • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 9480i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions* Function Description 1 Receiver 2 Volume key During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume During a call: Adjusts receiver volume During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left 3 Display 4 Features ƒ Key List Access key to the programmed Feature Key List Scrolls up when in the various lists Adds a space during editing 5 Softkeys Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys 6 Call key U
Overview IP Phone Models Model 6751i IP Phone This section provides brief information about the Model 6751i IP Phone. It includes a list of features and describes the hard keys on the 6751i. The 6751i is available with a symbol keypad or a text keypad.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6751i Symbol Key Descriptions*. Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings.
Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you. Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer calls when required.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models 6751i Text Key Descriptions*. Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Services key - Accesses services and options to customize your phone. This keys also access the Directory List and Callers List. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings.
Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you. Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. UP Arrow - This key also acts as a Transfer Key, allowing you to transfer calls when required.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Model 6753i IP Phone ra f t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6753i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default programmable keys on the 6753i.
Overview IP Phone Models 6753i Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone. Your System Administrator may have already customized some of your settings. Check with your System Administrator before changing the administrator-only options. Hold key - Places an active call on hold.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Navigation keys - Pressing the UP and DOWN arrow keys lets you view different status and text messages on the LCD display (if there is more than 1 line of status/text messages). These buttons also let you scroll through menu selections, such as the Options List. Pressing the LEFT and RIGHT arrow keys lets you view the different line/ call appearances. While in the Options List, these keys allow you to exit or enter the current option.
Overview IP Phone Models Model 6755i IP Phone ra f t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6755i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys, default programmable keys, and default softkeys on the 6755i.
• • • • Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 6755i Key Descriptions* Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes. t1 Options key - Accesses options to customize your phone.
Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Softkeys - 6 Bottom keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions). By default, keys 1 through 6 have no assigned functions. You can configure all 6 bottom softkeys to perform specific functions on the 6755i IP phone. However, after you lift the handset, there are specific static softkeys that display that cannot be changed. These are as follows: 1 - DIAL 2 - CONF 3 - XFER Allows you to dial out on the phone.
Overview IP Phone Models Model 6757i and 6757i CT IP Phones ra f 6757i t1 This section provides brief information about the Model 6757i IP Phone. It includes a list of features, and describes the hard keys and default softkeys on the 6757i.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models • • • • Inline power support (based on 802.3af standard) which eliminates power adapters. AC power adapter (included) Enhanced busy lamp fields* Set paging* *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider. 6757i and 6757i CT Key Descriptions* Keys Key Description Goodbye key - Ends an active call. The Goodbye key also exits an open list, such as the Options List, without saving changes.
Overview IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Handsfree key - Activates Handsfree for making and receiving calls without lifting the handset. When the audio mode option is set, this key is used to switch between a headset and the handsfree speakerphone. Mute key - Mutes the microphone so that your caller cannot hear you (the light indicator flashes when the microphone is on mute).
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Keys Key Description Softkeys - 12 softkeys on the 6757i IP Phone. - 6 Top Keys: programmable static softkeys (up to 10 programmable functions) - 6 Bottom Keys: programmable state-based softkeys (up to 20 programmable functions) By default, the top softkeys 1 through 4 are assigned as Services, Directory, Callers List, and Intercom, respectively. Keys 5 and 6 have no assigned functions.
Overview IP Phone Models 6757i CT Cordless Handset Features 5 line backlit display screen 2 multi-functional softkeys Programmable function key supports up to 14 functions Vibration Alerter Headset Jack Desk charging stand D ra f t1 • • • • • • 6757i CT Cordless Handset Key Descriptions Function # Function Description 1 Receiver 2 Volume key During Ringing: Adjusts ringer volume During a call: Adjusts receiver volume During text mode (not in a call): Moves cursor right/left 3 Display 4 Featu
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone Models Function Description 5 Softkeys Activates feature or option shown on the display above the keys 6 Call key Used to obtain dial tone Also used as a Hold key 7 Dial Pad 8 Mute Key When used, prevents the caller from hearing you 9 Headset Jack 10 Status Light 11 Release key To end calls and go on hook Exits Menu and the various lists 12 Menu Key Access key to the different Options Scrolls down when in the various lists Used as Backspace during editi
Overview Firmware Installation Information Firmware Installation Information Description The firmware setup and installation for the IP phone can be done using any of the following: • Phone User Interface via the keypad (Phone UI) • Aastra Web-based user interface (Aastra Web UI) Installation Considerations t1 When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware Installation Information Installation Requirements The following are general requirements for setting up and using your SIP IP phone: • SIP-based IP PBX system or network installed and running with a SIP account created for the IP phone. • Access to a Trivial File Transfer Protocol (TFTP), File Transfer Protocol (FTP), Hypertext Transfer Protocol (HTTP) server, or HyperText Transfer Protocol over Secure Sockets Layer (SSL) (HTTPS).
Overview Firmware Installation Information Configuration Server Requirement A basic requirement for setting up the IP phone is to have a configuration server. The configuration server allows you to: • Store the firmware images that you need to download to your IP phone. • Stores configuration files for the IP phone • Stores the software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone Note: If you use TFTP, the configuration server must be able to accept connections anonymously.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware and Configuration Files Firmware and Configuration Files Description When the IP phone is initialized for the first time, DHCP is enabled by default allowing the phone to automatically get its IP address from the network. Upon bootup, the phone also automatically updates it firmware and configuration files from the configuration server using the default TFTP protocol. The IP Phones support TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS as download protocols.
Overview Firmware and Configuration Files The following table provides the files that the phone requests from the configuration server during bootup of the phone: Associated Firmware Configuration Files Language Files 9143i 9143i.st aastra.cfg 9480i 9480i.st 9480i CT 9480iCT.st 6751i 51i.st 6753i 53i.st 6755i 55i.st 6757i 57i.st .cfg (for example, 00085D1610DE.cfg) lang_de.txt (German) lang_es.txt (Spanish) lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish) lang_fr.txt (French) lang_fr_ca.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Firmware and Configuration Files Configuration File Precedence Aastra IP phones can accept two sources of configuration data: • The server configuration most recently downloaded/cached from the configuration server files, aastra.cfg/.cfg (or the aastra.tuz/.tuz encrypted equivalents).
Overview Firmware and Configuration Files Installing the Firmware/Configuration Files The following procedure describes how to install the firmware and configuration files. Step Action 1 If DHCP is disabled, manually enter the configuration server’s IP address. For details on manually setting DHCP, see Chapter 4, the section “DHCP” on page 4-4. 2 Copy the firmware file .st to the root directory of the configuration server.
t1 ra f D
Chapter 2 Configuration Interface Methods About this chapter Introduction t1 This chapter describes the methods you, as an Administrator, can use to configure the IP phones. ra f Note: Features, characteristics, requirements, and configuration that are specific to a particular IP phone models are indicated where required in this guide.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Configuration Methods Description You can use the following to setup and configure the IP phone: • IP phone UI • Aastra Web UI • Configuration files t1 Note: There are specific parameters you can configure using only the IP Phone UI, only and Aastra Web UI, only the configuration files, or a combination of any of these methods. For more information about configuring the phone, see Chapter 4, Chapter 5, and Chapter 6.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Options Key The Options key allows you to access the "Options List" on the IP phone. Accessible options in this list are for both user and Administrator use. An Administrator must enter a password for administrator options. Note: An Administrator can apply a simplified options menu to the IP phones. An Administrator can also enable and disable the use of an Administrator password protection in the IP phone UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Options Key 6751i 6753i t1 6755i ra f Options Key 6757i CT Handset D 6757i/6757i CT 2-4 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Using the Options Key Step Action 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: Press the Services key on the 6751i and then select Options from the list. 2 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the list of options. On 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: To select an option, press the Enter softkey, or select the number on the keypad that corresponds to the option in the Option List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Aastra Web UI An administrator can setup and configure the IP phone using the Aastra Web UI. The Aastra Web UI supports Internet Explorer and Gecko engine-based browsers like Firefox, Mozilla or Netscape. Note: An Administrator can enable or disable the Aastra Web UI for a single phone or all phones in a network. For more information about enabling/disabling the Aastra Web UI, see “Enabling/Disabling the Aastra Web UI” on page 2-16.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods HTTP/HTTPS Client and Server Support The Aastra IP phones allow for HTTP request processing and associated data transfers to perform over a secure connection (HTTPS). The IP phones support the following: • Transfer of firmware images, configuration files, script files, and web page content over a secure connection. • Web browser phone configuration over a secure connection. • TLS 1.0or SSL 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Non-Blocking HTTP Connections The IP Phones support a non-blocking HTTP connection feature. This feature allows the user to continue using the phone when there is a delay during an HTTP connection while the phone is waiting for the HTTP server to respond. This feature also allows a user to abort the connection and perform other operations on the phone (which will abort the HTTP connection automatically).
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Using HTTPS via the Aastra Web UI HTTPS is enabled by default on the IP phones. When you open a browser window and enter an IP address or host name for a phone using HTTP, a server redirection occurs which automatically converts an HTTP connection to an HTTPS connection. After the redirection, a “Security Alert” certificate window displays alerting the user that information exchanged with the phone cannot be viewed or changed by others.
Accessing the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to access the Aastra Web UI. Step Action 1 Open your web browser and enter the phone’s IP address or host name into the address field. The following is an example of the Login screen that displays.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Step Action 2 Enter your username and password and click . Note: For an administrator, the default username is “admin” and the password is “22222”. For a user, the default username is “user” and the password field is left blank. The IP phones accept numeric passwords only. The Network Status window displays for the IP phone you are accessing. The following illustration is an example of a Network Status screen for the 9143i IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Depending on the model phone you are accessing, the following categories display in the side menu of the Aastra Web UI: Status, Operation, Basic Settings, Advanced Settings. Note: Programmable Keys apply to the 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i. Softkeys apply to the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. Expansion Modules apply to the 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Heading Description Softkeys and XML 9480i/9480i CT6 state-based, multi-functional softkeys 6755i 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys 6757i/6757i CT6 Top, multi-functional, static softkeys 6 Bottom, state-based, multi-functional softkeys (Applicable to User and Administrator). The M670i has up to 36 configurable keys. The M675i has up to 60 configurable keys.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Basic Settings The Basic Settings section provides the following options: Heading Description Preferences Allows you to set the following General specifications on the IP phone.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Advanced Settings (Applicable to Administrator Only) The Advanced Settings section provides the following options: Description Network Allows you to set Basic Network Settings, Advanced Network Settings, Type of Service DSCP, and VLAN settings.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Methods Heading Description 802.1x Support Allows you to enable/disable the 802.1x Protocol (Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP)) to use on the IP phones for authentication purposes. Applicable choices are EAP-MD5 or EAP-TLS. (Applicable to Administrator Only) Troubleshooting Allows you to perform troubleshooting tasks whereby the results can be forwarded to Aastra Technical Support for analyzing and troubleshooting.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Configuration Files (Administrator Only) A system administrator can enter specific parameters in the configuration files to configure the IP phones. All parameters in configuration files can only be set by an administrator. You can enter specific configuration parameters in either of the following configuration files: • aastra.cfg • .cfg References t1 For information about configuration file precedence, see Chapter 1, “Overview.
Configuration files Step Action 1 Using a text-based editing application, open the configuration file for the phone, for which you want to configure the directory list (either aastra.cfg, .cfg or both). 2 Enter the required configuration parameters followed by the applicable value. For example, directory 1: company_directory directory 2: my_personal_directory 3 Save the changes and close the configuration file.
Configuration Interface Methods Configuration Methods Notes: 1. The “parameter locking” feature applies to Release 2.4 and up. Any phones that have a previous release loaded on the phone will not be able to use the locking functionality in the configuration file. 2. Any parameter duplicated in the mac.cfg from the aastra.cfg is overwritten by the locking status and the value of the parameter found in the mac.cfg file.
t1 ra f D
Chapter 3 Administrator Options About this chapter Introduction ra f t1 The IP phones provide specific options on the IP Phone that only an Administrator can access. These options are password protected and allow an Administrator to change or set features and configuration information as required. For all models, an Administrator can use the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files to enter and change values.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 3-15 Basic Settings page 3-19 Account Configuration page 3-35 Network Settings page 3-37 Line Settings page 3-71 Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys page 3-72 Action URI page 3-73 Configuration Server Settings page 3-75 Firmware Update Features page 3-84 TLS Support page 3-85 802.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Administrator Level Options Description There are options on the IP phone that both a User and Administrator can access. However, there are specific options that an Administrator can access only. These options allow the Administrator to configure and manage local and/or remote IP phones in a network. IP Phone UI Options t1 An Administrator can access and manage these options using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options The following are administrator options in the "Options List" on the IP phone UI: • Administrator Menu — Configuration Server — Network Settings — SIP Settings — Factory Default — Erase Local Config. References D ra f t1 For information about all other user options in the “Options Menu”, see your model-specific SIP IP Phone User Guide.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Simplified IP Phone UI Options Menu An Administrator can replace the existing options menu on the Phone UI with a more simplified options menu. In the configuration files, the “options simple menu” parameter allows you to display either the full menu (if set to 0), or the simplified menu (if set to 1). The following table illustrates the differences between the full menu and the simplified menu.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Aastra Web UI Options An Administrator can configure specific options using the Aastra Web UI. These options display after an Administrator logs into the Web UI using a Web browser and entering the Admin username and password at the login prompt (The default username is "admin" and the default password is "22222". The IP phones accept numeric passwords only.) The column on the left side of the screen indicates the configurable options.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options The following are options that an Administrator can configure in the Aastra Web UI (and are not available for the User to configure): • • • Operation->Reset — Restore to Factory Defaults — Remove Local Configuration Settings Basic Settings->Preferences->General — Local Dial Plan — Send Dial Plan Terminator — Digit Timeout (seconds) Basic Settings->Preferences->Outgoing Intercom Settings (User can configure this via the Aastra Web UI if enabled by an Adm
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options References For information about options available to a User AND Administrator in the Aastra Web UI, see your Model-specific User Guide. For procedures to Restart your phone or restore factory defaults, see “Restarting Your Phone” on page 3-13, and “Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration” on page 3-15.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Phone Status The Phone Status on the IP Phone displays the network status and firmware version of the IP phone. You can display phone status using the IP phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Phone Status via IP Phone UI In the IP phone UI, the Phone Status options are available to the user and the administrator and do not require a password entry.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options • IP&MAC Addresses Displays the IP address and MAC address of the phone. • LAN Port Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its LAN port. • PC Port Displays the Link State, Negotiation Method, Speed, and Duplex Method that the phone uses on its PC Port. • Firmware Info Displays information about the firmware that is currently installed on the IP phone.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options The following is a description of the information on the Network Status screen: Network Attributes Displays the network status of the Ethernet ports at the back of the phone. You can also view the phone’s IP and MAC addresses. Information in this field includes Link State, Negotiation, Speed, and Duplex for Port 0 and Port 1. • Hardware Information Displays the current IP phone platform and the revision number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options The following table describes the status conditions that can display for an account(s). Status Condition Description Registered Displays this status on accounts that HAVE been registered with the SIP proxy server. Example: Line 1 Backup Registrar SIP Account Status Used? 9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.com:5060Registered Yes SIP Error Number t1 where Account Number is “1” SIP Account is “9057604603@anasipproxy.aastra.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Restarting Your Phone As System Administrator, there may be times when you need to restart a phone. The Restart option allows you reboot the phone when required. A reset may be necessary when: • There is a change in your network, OR • To re-load modified configuration files, OR • If the settings for the IP phone on the IP PBX system have been modified. You can restart the phone using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click ra f t1 1 D to restart the phone. 3-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Set Phone to Factory Defaults/Erase Local Configuration You can set phones to their factory default setting or remove a local phone’s configuration using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Setting Factory Defaults on the Phone Factory default settings are the settings that reside on the phone after it has left the factory. The factory default settings on the phone sets the factory defaults for all of the settings in the aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Settings Factory Defaults Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Restore to Factory Defaults" field, click ra f t1 Step . D This restores all factory defaults, and removes any saved configuration and directory list files. 3-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration You can reset the IP Phone’s local configuration if required. The local configuration is the last updated configuration you performed using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI. Performing this action results in losing all recently user-modified settings. For more information about local configuration, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration File Precedence” on page 1-38.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Erasing the Phone’s Local Configuration Using the Aastra Web UII Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Operation->Reset->Current Settings. 2 In the "Remove Local Configuration Settings" field, click ra f t1 Step . D This removes the last customized configuration settings made on the phone. 3-18 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Basic Settings An Administrator has access to specific Basic Setting options to configure and manage the IP Phone in the network. The following sections identify the options available to an Administrator only, or where indicated, to a User and Administrator. These tables also identify whether you can configure them using the Aastra Web UI, IP Phone UI, or the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Park Call sprecode Description The parking of a live call to a specific extension. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This feature on the Basic Preferences screen is available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only. To configure the Park feature on a global basis, see Chapter 5, the section, “Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls” on page 5-59.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Play Call Waiting Tone call waiting tone Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes into the phone. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Stuttered Dial Tone For more information on this feature, see. “Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone” on page 5-67.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Preferred Line Timeout (seconds) preferred line timeout Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call goodbye key cancels incoming call For more information on this feature, see “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-87. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Call Forward Key Mode call forward key mode Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description Allows you to configure the Call Forward mode to use on the phone (Account, Phone, or Custom). You can configure Call Forward for all accounts or a specific account. For more information on this feature, see “Call Forward Mode” on page 5-93.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Calls The Incoming/Outgoing Intercom Call settings on the IP Phone specify whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. These settings also specify the prefix code for server-side Intercom calls, and specifies the configuration to use when making the Intercom call.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Description Outgoing Intercom Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Type sip intercom type Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed. Applicable settings are Phone-Side, Server-Side, OFF.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Group Paging RTP Settings Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Paging listen addresses paging addr list Description Allows you to specify up to 5 listening multicast addresses to send/receive a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to/from these pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling. Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Ring Tones Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Tone Set Parameter in Configuration Files Tone Set tone set Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Ring Tone Globally sets a tone set for a specific country For more information on this feature, see “Ring Tones and Tone Sets” on page 5-117. Global Ring Tone ring tone Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files External alert external Description When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone. For more information on this feature, see “Priority Alerting” on page 5-122.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Parameter in Aastra Web UI Directed Call Pickup Parameters in Configuration Files directed call pickup Description Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature. For more information on this feature, see “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception)” on page 5-129.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Auto Call Distribution (ACD) Settings Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Auto Available acd auto available Description Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer. For more information on this feature, see “Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers)” on page 5-188.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Time and Date Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Time Format Time Format Parameters in Configuration Files time format Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0” for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format. For more information on this feature, see “Time and Date” on page 5-19.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Time Server 1 Time Server 1 Parameters in Configuration Files time server1 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Time Server 2 time server2 Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. This parameter allows you to set the IP address of Time Server 2 in dotted decimal format.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Live Dialpad Parameter in IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Live Dialpad N/A Parameters in Configuration Files live dialpad Note: This option can be set by a User via the IP Phone UI and by an Administrator via the IP Phone UI and the configuration files. Description This parameter turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF. For more information on this feature, see “Live Dial Pad*” on page 5-33.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameter in Configuration Files Input Language input language Note: This option can be set by both Users and Administrators. Description Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone. Entering a language value for this parameter allows users to enter text and characters in the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and in XML applications via the keypad on the phone, in the language(s) specified.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Account Configuration The IP phones have a DND and CFWD feature that allows an Administrator and User to configure “do not disturb” and “call forwarding” by account. You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND and CFWD.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Modes DND CFWD Phone Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone. A Sets the same CFWD configuration for all pre-configured DND key toggles all accounts accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer). When on the phone to ON or OFF. you configure the initial account, the phone applies the configuration to all other accounts. (In the Aastra Web UI, only the account you configured is enabled.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Network Settings The following paragraphs describe the network parameters you can configure on the IP phone. Network settings are in two categories: • Basic network settings • Advanced network settings D ra f t1 Note: Specific parameters are configurable using the Aastra Web UI only and are indicated where applicable. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic Network Settings If Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) is enabled, the IP phone automatically configures all of the Network settings. If the phone cannot populate the Network settings, or if DHCP is disabled, you can set the Network options manually. Parameter In IP Phone UI DHCP Parameters in Configuration Files dhcp Description Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required network information.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Subnet Mask Parameter in Aastra Web UI Subnet Mask Parameters in Configuration Files subnet mask Description Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone. To assign a static subnet mask, disable DHCP. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. Gateway Gateway default gateway The IP address of the network’s gateway or default router IP address.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Secondary DNS Parameter in Aastra Web UI Secondary DNS Parameters in Configuration Files dns2 Description A service that translates domain names into IP addresses. To assign static DNS addresses, disable DHCP. For more information, see “Configuring Network Settings Manually” on page 4-24. Hostname Hostname hostname Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options D ra f t1 Advanced Network Settings 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI DHCP User Class Parameter in Aastra Web UI DHCP User Class Parameters in Configuration Files dhcp userclass Description Specifies the User Class DHCP Option 77 that the phone sends to the configuration server with the DHCP Request packet. Note: If you specify a value for this parameter, you must restart your phone for the change to take affect. Any change in its value during start-up results in an automatic reboot.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI LLDP Support Parameter in Aastra Web UI LLDP Parameters in Configuration Files lldp Description Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone. Caution: In Release 2.3 and later, LLDP is enabled by default. If LLDP is enabled on your network, the phones may come up with different network settings.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI UPnP Parameter in Aastra Web UI UPnP Parameters in Configuration Files upnp manager Description Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP phone and the UPnP manager will not start. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones)” on page 4-50.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI NAT RTP Port Parameter in Aastra Web UI NAT RTP Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip nat rtp port Description Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI NTP Time Servers Parameters in Configuration Files time server disabled Description Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters. Setting this parameter to 0 allows the use of the configured Time Server(s). Setting this parameter to 1 prevents the use of the configured Time Server(s).
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options HTTPS Settings Advanced Network Settings includes HTTPS settings for the IP Phones. Parameter In IP Phone UI HTTPS Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Server Redirect HTTP to HTTPS Parameters in Configuration Files https redirect http get Description Allows or disallows redirection from the HTTP server to the HTTPS server. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Client Method Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Client Method Parameters in Configuration Files https client method Description Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are: For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Client/Server Configuration” on page 4-40. D ra f t1 TLS 1.0 - Transport Layer Security version 1 (TLS 1.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Cert Validation Parameter in Aastra Web UI Validate Certificates Parameters in Configuration Files Description https validate certificates Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone. When this parameter is set to 1, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them. t1 Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Check Hostnames Parameter in Aastra Web UI Check Certificate Hostnames Parameters in Configuration Files Description https validate hostnames Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “HTTPS Server Certificate Validation” on page 4-44. N/A Trusted Certificates Filename https user certificates Specifies a file name for a .
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Type of Service (ToS), DSCP Advanced Network Settings include Type of Service (ToS) and Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for the IP phones. Parameter In IP Phone UI Type of Service SIPt Parameter in Aastra Web UI SIP Parameters in Configuration Files tos sip Description The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options VLAN You can enable or disable VLAN and set specific VLAN IDs and priorities under Network Settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description Global Settings VLAN Enable VLAN Enable tagging enabled Enables or disables VLAN on the IP phones. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Virtual LAN (optional)” on page 4-54.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority Parameters in Configuration Files tos priority map Description This parameter is based on the Type of Service (ToS), Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) setting for SIP (tos sip parameter), RTP (tos rtp parameter) and RTCP (tos rtcp parameter). It is the mapping between the DSCP value and the VLAN priority value for SIP, RTP, and RTCP packets.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description PC Port Settings (Port 1) PC Port VLAN ID VLAN ID VLAN id port 1 Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1. Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this port.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options SIP Settings The following paragraphs describe the SIP parameters you can configure on the IP phone. SIP configuration consists of configuring: • Basic SIP Authentication Settings • Basic SIP Network Settings • Advanced SIP settings • RTP Settings • Autodial Settings t1 Notes: 1. Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic SIP Authentication Settings Screen Name Parameter in Aastra Web UI Screen Name (Global and Per-Line) N/A Screen Name 2 (Global and Per-Line) User Name Phone Number sip screen name (global) sip lineN screen name (per-line) sip screen name 2 (global) sip lineN screen name 2 (per-line) sip user name (global) ra f (Global and Per-Line) Parameters in Configuration Files sip lineN user name (per-line) D Display Name Caller ID (Global
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Auth Name Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Authentication Name sip auth name (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN auth name (per-line) Description Authorization name used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request. Valid values are up to 20 alphanumeric characters. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Basic SIP Network Settings Parameter In IP Phone UI Proxy Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI Proxy Server (Global and Per-Line) Proxy Port Proxy Port IP address of the SIP proxy server. Up to 64 alphanumeric characters. sip lineN proxy ip (per-line) For more information, see Chapter 4, “Basic SIP Settings” on page 4-71. sip proxy port (global) SIP proxy server’s port number. Default is 0.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Outbound Proxy Server (Global and Per-Line) Parameters in Configuration Files Description sip outbound proxy server (global) Address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a sip lineN outbound proxy Session Border Controller in your server network, then you would normally (per-line) set its address here.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Backup Registrar Server sip backup registrar ip (global) (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN backup registrar ip (per-line) Description The address of the backup registrar (typically, the backup SIP proxy) for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests if the primary registrar is unavailable.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Advanced SIP Settings In addition to the basic SIP settings, you can also configure the following advanced SIP parameters. These parameters are configurable via the Aastra Web UI and the configuration files on a global basis only.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Missed Call Summary Subscription Period sip missed call summary subscription period Description Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled with a default value of 86400 seconds. When the phone reaches the limit set for this parameter, it sends the subscription again.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Send Line Number in REGISTER Message Parameters in Configuration Files sip send line Description Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the line number that is being registered. For more information about this parameter, see Chapter 6, the section, “MAC Address/ Line Number in REGISTER Messages” on page 6-5.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Transport Protocol Parameters in Configuration Files sip transport protocol Description The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets. t1 Notes: 1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled. If it is enabled, the phone uses Persistent TLS on the connection.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Local SIP TLS Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip local tls port Description Specifies the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp. For more information, see Chapter 4, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI BLF Subscription Period Parameters in Configuration Files sip blf subscription period Description Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Advanced SIP Settings (optional)” on page 4-84.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter in Aastra Web UI Whitelist Proxy Parameters in Configuration Files sip whitelist Description This parameter enables/disables the whitelist proxy feature, as follows: • Set to 0 to disable the feature. • Set to 1 to enable the feature. When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only. The IP phone rejects any call requests from an untrusted proxy server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options RTP Settings You can configure the following RTP settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI RTP Port Base Parameter in Aastra Web UI RTP Port Parameters in Configuration Files sip rtp port Description The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons. You may want to use this parameter to send RTP data using a different port. Default is 3000. Basic Codecs (G.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Customized Codec Preference List Parameters in Configuration Files sip customized codec Description Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. For more information, see Chapter 4, “Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings” on page 4-93.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Autodial Settings You can configure the following Autodial settings. Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Autodial Number sip autodial number (Global and Per-Line) sip lineN autodial number Description Globally or on a per-line basis, specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Line Settings An administrator can configure multiple lines on the IP phone with the same SIP network configuration (global) or a different SIP network configuration (per-line). The following table provides the number of lines available for each IP phone model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys A user or administrator can assign specific functions to softkeys, programmable keys, or expansion module keys. The available keys for configuration depend on the IP phone model as shown in the following table.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Action URI The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur. The Action URI feature prevents the phones from hanging if the Action URIs should fail. The phones also support transparent, non-blocking, XML post execute item URIs. The IP phone XML events that support this feature are defined in the following table.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Reference For more information about setting the Action URIs for XML applications, see “XML Action URIs” on page 5-325. Action URI Disconnected The phones allow an Administrator to specify a URI to allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Configuration Server Settings The configuration server stores the firmware images, configuration files, and software when performing software upgrades to the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Primary TFTP Parameter in Aastra Web UI TFTP Server Parameters in Configuration Files tftp server Description The TFTP server’s IP address or qualified domain name. If DHCP is enabled and the DHCP server provides the information, this field is automatically populated. Use this parameter to change the IP address or domain name of the TFTP server.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Alternate TFTP Path Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Alternate TFTP Path alternate tftp path Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the Alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI FTP Path Parameter in Aastra Web UI FTP Path Parameters in Configuration Files ftp path Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the FTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. If the IP phone’s configuration and firmware files are located in a sub-directory beneath the server’s root directory, the relative path to that sub-directory should be entered in this field.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI HTTP Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTP Server Parameters in Configuration Files http server Description The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server. See the next parameter (http path). For more information, see Chapter 4, “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Download Server Parameter in Aastra Web UI HTTPS Server Parameters in Configuration Files https server Description The HTTPS server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTPS relative path to the HTTPS server. See the next parameter (https path).
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Parameter in Aastra Web UI Parameters in Configuration Files Description Auto-Resync Settings Mode auto resync mode Enables and disables the phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour period. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers. Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI Time (24-hour) Parameters in Configuration Files auto resync time Description Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, and HTTP servers. Notes: 1. The resync time is based on the local time of the IP phone. 2. The value of 00:00 is 12:00 A.M. 3.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Maximum Delay Parameters in Configuration Files auto resync max delay Description Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync. For more information, see Chapter 8, the section, “Using the Auto-Resync Feature” on page 8-7. N/A Days auto resync days Specifies the amount of days that the phone waits between checksync operations.
Firmware Update Features The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration server. You can download the firmware stored on the configuration server in one of three ways: Using the “Firmware Update” page in the Aastra Web UI at the location Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. • Using the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI to restart the phone.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options TLS Support The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. An Administrator can configure the following parameters for TLS Support.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI N/A Parameters in Configuration Files sips persistent tls Description Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS). t1 Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename Parameters in Configuration Files sips root and intermediate certificates Description Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Private Key Filename Parameters in Configuration Files sips private key Description Allows you to specify a Private Key file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The key file must use the format “.pem”.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options 802.1x Support The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x Protocol. The 802.1x Protocol is a standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or wireless Local Area Network (LAN). The 802.1x Protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access, and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI MD5 Password Parameter in Aastra Web UI MD5 Password Parameters in Configuration Files md5 password Description Specifies the password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.1x Support->EAP-MD5 Settings->MD5 Password. The password displays as “*******”.
Administrator Options Administrator Level Options Parameter In IP Phone UI N/A Parameter in Aastra Web UI Local Certificate Filename Parameters in Configuration Files 802.1x local certificate Description Specifies the file name that contains the local certificate. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.1x Support” on page 6-31. N/A Private Key Filename 802.1x private key Specifies the file name that contains the private key. For more information, see Chapter 6, the section, “802.
Troubleshooting The Troubleshooting feature in the Aastra Web UI provides tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features About this chapter About this chapter ra f Introduction t1 Chapter 4 Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features D This chapter provides the information required to configure the Network and Global SIP features on the IP Phone. These features are password protected on the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topics This chapter covers the following topics: Topic Page Overview page 4-3 Network Settings page 4-4 Basic Network Settings page 4-4 Advanced Network Settings page 4-30 Global SIP Settings page 4-70 page 4-71 Advanced SIP Settings (optional) page 4-84 Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings page 4-93 Autodial Settings t1 Basic SIP Settings Configuration Server Protocol page 4-108 D ra f Configuring the Configuration Server Protoc
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Overview Overview An administrator can configure the IP Phone Network and SIP options from the phone UI, from the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. Administrator level options are password protected in both the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI. Note: An administrator has the option of enabling and disabling the use of password protection in the IP phone UI. This is configurable using the configuration files only.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Network Settings This section describes the basic network settings on the IP phone which include configuring for: DHCP • IP Address (of phone) • Subnet Mask (of phone) • Gateway • Primary DNS • Secondary DNS • LAN Port • PC Port DHCP ra f Basic Network Settings t1 • D The IP phone is capable of querying a DHCP server, allowing a network administrator a centralized and automated method of configuring various network parameters for the phone.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings • FTP Path • HTTP Server • HTTP Path • HTTP Port • HTTPS Server • HTTPS Path • HTTPS Port t1 The network administrator chooses which of these parameters (if any) are supplied to the IP phone by the DHCP server. The administrator must configure the phone manually to provide any required network parameters not supplied by the DHCP server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP on the phone using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select option DHCP. 6 Press Change to set "Use DHCP?" to "Yes" (enable) or "No" (disable). 7 Press Done to save the changes.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Enabling/Disabling DHCP Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable DHCP using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 Enable the "DHCP" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings DHCP Options 60, 66, and 43 Server Configurations Option 66 The IP Phones support download protocols according to RFC2131 and RFC1541 (TFTP, FTP, HTTP,. HTTPS) to support DHCP option 66. Option 66 is part of the DHCP Offer message that the DHCP server generates to tell the phone which configuration server it should use to download new firmware and configuration files.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The System administrator can use the Vendor Class Identifier to send the phone a customized Server Configuration in option 43 (Vendor-Specific information). Note: If Aastra IP Phones receive the server configuration from both DHCP Option 66 and DHCP Option 43, then Option 43 takes precedence over Option 66.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Your DHCP server configuration file, such as the dhcpd.conf file, may include one of these lines to configure the configuration server protocol and the server details. Protocol Format Examples HTTP http:/// option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45”; option tftp-server-name “http://192.168.1.45/path”; option tftp-server-name “http://httpsvr.example.com/path”; HTTPS https:/// option tftp-server-name “https://192.168.1.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Using Option 12 Hostname on the IP Phone If you set the phone to use DHCP Option 12, the phone automatically sends this option to the configuration server. This option specifies the hostname (name of the client). The name may or may not be qualified with the local domain name (based on RFC 2132). See RFC 1035 for character set restrictions. Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select Hostname. 4 By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example, 53i00085D164435). t1 2 Restart the phone for the change to take affect.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. Hostname By default, the “Hostname” field is automatically populated with [] of your phone (for example, 53i00085D164435). D 2 ra f t1 1 If you want to change the hostname, enter a hostname for your phone in the “Hostname” field. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Using Option 77 User Class on the IP Phone DHCP Option 77 User Class is sent in DHCP request packets from the phone to the configuration server. This Option 77 defines specific User Class identifiers to convey information about a phone’s software configuration or about its user's preferences.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select DHCP Settings. 4 Select DHCP User Class. 5 In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones, then press DONE. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. For example, “admin”.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 DHCP User Class 2 In the “DHCP User Class” field, enter a DHCP User Class to apply to your phones. For example, “admin”. Valid values are up to 64 alpha-numeric characters. 3 Click to save your changes. Note: Entering a value in the “DHCP User Class” field requires a reboot of your phone. 4 4-16 Click on Operation->Reset, and click RESTART.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Using Options 159 and 160 on the IP Phone In addition to DHCP options 43 and 66 already supported on the IP Phones, the phones also support DHCP Options 159 and 160. The IP Phones use the following order of precedence when deriving the configuration server parameters: 43, 160, 159, 66.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Enter you Administrator password and press Enter. 3 Select Network Settings. 4 Select DHCP Settings. 5 Select Download Options.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 D ra f t1 DHCP Download Options Parameter In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select an option to use to override the normal precedence order.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuration Server Download Precedence An Administrator can set the phone’s download precedence to ignore DHCP, (only during the boot when the remote configuration server is contacted) and use the following precedence instead: 1. Configuration URI, 2. DHCP, and then 3. Direct configuration. t1 To configure the download precedence, you use the option value (-1) as the value for the “dhcp config option override” parameter in the configuration files.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring a Download Precedence Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the IP Phone UI. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Enter you Administrator password and press Enter. 3 Select Network Settings. 4 Select DHCP Settings.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring a Download Precedence Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure a download precedence using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 DHCP Download Options Parameter 2 In the “DHCP Download Options” field, select “Disabled” from the list of options.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Multiple DHCP Servers The IP Phones can receive messages from multiple DHCP servers. After the phone receives its first DHCP message, it listens for a specific time period, for more DHCP messages. If the first DHCP offer contains configuration server information (Options 43, 66, 159 or 160), then the phone times out and continues using the first DHCP offer, without listening for more DHCP offers.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring Network Settings Manually If you disable DHCP on your phone, you need to configure the following network settings manually: • IP Address • Subnet Mask • Gateway • Primary DNS • Secondary DNS t1 Note: If you disable DHCP on the phone, the phone uses the TFTP protocol as the default server protocol. If you want to specify a different protocol to use, see “Configuration Server Protocol” on page 4-108.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Select Gateway and enter the gateway address. 8 Select DNS and enter a Primary and/or Secondary DNS server. 9 Press Done to save the changes. The IP phone is manually configured. . t1 Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 Enter an IP address of the phone in the IP Address field. 3 Enter a subnet mask in the Subnet Mask field.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring LAN and PC Port Negotiation Ethernet is the computer networking technology for local area networks (LANs). You use the LAN Port to connect to a LAN using a twisted pair 10BASE-T cable to transmit 10BASE-T Ethernet. You use the PC Port to connect to the configuration server (your PC). There are two Ethernet ports on the rear of the IP phones: LAN Port and PC Port.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Full-Duplex (10Mbps or 100Mbps) Full-duplex data transmission means that data can be transmitted in both directions on a signal carrier at the same time. For example, on a LAN with a technology that has full-duplex transmission, one device can be sending data on the line while another device is receiving data. Full-duplex transmission implies a bidirectional line (one that can move data in both directions).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Select a negotiation method to use on port 0 and press Done. Valid values are: • AutoNegotiation • FullDuplex 10Mbps • FullDuplex 100Mbps • HalfDuplex 10Mbps • HalfDuplex 100Mbps Default is AutoNegotiation. Select PC Port Link. 9 Select a negotiation method to use on port 1and press Done.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. 2 In the “LAN Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 0. Valid values are: • Auto Negotiation • Full Duplex, 10Mbps • Full Duplex, 100Mbps • Half Duplex, 10Mbps • Half Duplex, 100Mbps D ra f t1 Step Default is Auto Negotiation. 3 In the “PC Port” field, select a negotiation method to use on port 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Advanced Network Settings You can set advanced network settings on the IP phone such as, Network Address Translation (NAT), Nortel NAT, Network Time Protocol (NTP) Time Servers, Virtual LAN (VLAN), and Quality of Service (QoS), and Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. Note: The available advanced network parameters via the IP phone UI are NAT, Nortel NAT, UPnP, VLAN, and QoS only.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Nortel Proxy/Registrar The phone at IP address 10.10.10.10 is configured to register with the proxy at 63.251.195.10. Because it is a Nortel proxy, the configuration must additionally include the "sip nortel nat support" and "sip nortel nat timer" settings, telling the firmware to enhance the protocols with Nortel specific content.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Nortel Networks NAT Nortel Networks provides a proprietary solution to support connectivity to their proxies from phones placed behind devices (such as routers or firewalls) that use NAT. Nortel uses the SIP ping request/reply between the Nortel proxy and the phone in order to keep the connection through the router or firewall active. A SIP Nortel NAT timer is the interval, in seconds (default is 60), that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Network Settings. 5 Select NAT Settings. 6 Select Nortel NAT. 7 Press Change to set either “Enabled” or “Disabled”. 8 Press Done (3 times) to finish. t1 on the phone to enter the Options List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Select Yes (enable) or No (disable) in the "Nortel NAT Traversal Enabled" field to enable or disable NAT for a Nortel network. 3 Enter a time, in seconds, in the "Nortel NAT timer" field. Valid values are 0 to 2147483647. Default is 60. 4 Click D ra f t1 Step 4-34 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring NAT Address and Port (optional) You can also configure a specific NAT address and port on the IP phone using the configuration files, IP Phone UI, or Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings” on page A-29. t1 IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Enter a NAT IP address in the "NAT IP" field. The value must be entered in dotted decimal format. For example, 0.0.0.0. The “NAT IP” is the public IP address of your NAT device. 3 Enter a NAT port in the "NAT SIP Port" field. Default is 51620. The “NAT SIP Port” is the public SIP signalling port number of your NAT device.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal A System Administrator can configure the SIP and TLS source ports on the IP Phone. Previously, the IP phone used default values (5060 for UDP/TCP and 5061 for TLS). The two new parameters for configuring the SIP and TLS source ports are: • sip local port • sip local tls port You can configure the SIP and TLS source ports using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure SIP and TLS ports for NAT traversal: • sip local port • sip local tls port Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections: “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting” on page A-32. “Local SIP TLS Port” on page A-32. D ra f t1 • • 4-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Configuring SIP and TLS Source Ports Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure SIP and TLS source ports using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. . D ra f t1 1 “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” Parameter 2 “Local SIP TLS Port” Parameter The “Local SIP UDP/TCP Port” field has a default value of 5060.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI 3 The “Local SIP TLS Port” field has a default value of 5061. Change this value if required to a value greater than 1024 and less than 65535. Note: It is recommended that you avoid the conflict with any TCP ports being used. For example: WebUI HTTP server on 80/tcp and HTTPS on 443/tcp. 4 Click to save your changes.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The HTTPS server provides HTTP functionality over secure connections. It coexists with the HTTP server but has its own set of tasks. The main HTTPS server functions are: • Delivery of web page content to a browser client over a secure connection. • Execution of HTTP GET and POST requests received over a secure connection.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Configuration Server. 5 Select HTTPS Settings. on the phone to enter the Options List. Configure HTTPS Client Select HTTPS Client. 7 Select Client Method. 8 Press Change to select a client method to use for HTTPS. Valid values are: 9 SSL 3.0 (default) TLS 1.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Select an HTTPS client method to use from the HTTPS Client Method field. Valid values are: D ra f t1 Step SSL 3.0 (default) TSL 1.0 3 Enable HTTP to HTTPS redirect by checking the HTTPS Server - Redirect HTTP to HTTPS field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). Default is disabled.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings HTTPS Server Certificate Validation The HTTPS client on the IP Phones support validation of HTTPS certificates.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Certificate Validation Certificate validation is enabled by default. Validation occurs by checking that the certificates are well formed and signed by one of the certificates in the trusted certificate set. It then checks the expiration date on the certificate, and finally, compares the name in the certificate with the address for which it was connected. If any of these validation steps fail, the connection is rejected.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Configuration Server. 3 Select HTTPS Settings->Cert. Validation. The following list displays: • Enable • Check Expires • Check Hostnames t1 2 ra f Enable/Disable HTTPS Server Certificate Validation 4 Select Enable. 5 Press Change to toggle the “Enable” field to “Yes” or “No”.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 9 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen. Note: This change is immediately applied after pressing DONE. Enable/Disable HTTPS Validate Hostnames 10 Select Check Hostnames. 11 Press Change to toggle the “Check Hostnames” field to “Yes” or “No”. 12 Press DONE to save the change and return to the Certificates screen.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings. The “Validate Certificates” field is enabled by default. To disable validation of certificates, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. ra f 2 t1 HTTPS Validation Certificate Parameters When this parameter is enabled, the HTTPS client performs validation on SSL certificates before accepting them. 3 D Notes: 1.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI 5 If you require the download of User-provided certificates in a .PEM formatted file, enter the file name in the format in the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field. For example: trustedCerts.pem This parameter specifies a file name for a .PEM file located on the configuration server. This file contains the User-provided certificates in PEM format.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) (for remote phones) UPnP is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings A User or Administrator can specify UPnP on specific lines using the configuration files (using the “upnp mapping lines” parameter) or the Aastra Web UI (at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->UPnP Mapping Lines). Reference For more information about enabling/disabling UPnP Mapping on specific lines, see Chapter 5, the section, “UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones)” on page 5-87.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Press Done (3 times) to save the changes. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings 9 Select Restart. . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 Step 4-52 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 The “UPnP” field is disabled by default. To enable UPnP, place a check in the “Enabled” box. Uncheck the box to disable this field. This field enables and disable UPnP on the IP phone. 3 Click D ra f t1 to save your settings. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Virtual LAN (optional) Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) is a feature on the IP phone that allows for multiple logical Ethernet interfaces to send outgoing RTP packets over a single physical Ethernet as described in IEEE Std 802.3. On the IP phone, you configure a VLAN ID that associates with the physical Ethernet port.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The following parameters allow an administrator to configure ToS, QoS, and DiffServ QoS for VLAN: Parameters in Configuration Files Parameters in Aastra Web UI Global tagging enabled VLAN enable priority non-ip Priority, Non-IP Packet LAN Port VLAN ID tos priority map SIP Priority tos priority map RTP Priority tos priority map RTCP Priority PC Port vlan id port 1 VLAN ID Priority ra f QoS eth port 1 priorit
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings DSCP Range/VLAN Priority Mapping DSCP bits in the ToS field of the IP header are set for RTP, RTCP, and SIP packets using either the default values or the values configured via the "tos sip", "tos rtp", and "tos rtcp" parameters. When the VLAN global configuration parameter, "tagging enabled" is set to 1, VLAN priority for IP packets is mapped to the DSCP value instead of a single priority for all packets.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings The following table identifies the default DSCP of protocols. Protocol Name Default DSCP Values in the ToS Field sip 26 rtp 46 rtcp 46 Configuring Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP (optional) Use the following procedures to configure ToS/DSCP on the IP phone. ra f Configuration Files t1 Note: ToS/DSCP is enabled by default. The SIP, RTP, and RTCP parameters show defaults of 26, 46, and 46, respectively.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Select Type of Service SIP. or Select Type of Service RTP. or Select Type of Service RTCP. 7 Enter a value for “Type of Service SIP”. Default is 26. or Enter a value for “Type of Service RTP”. Default is 46. or Enter a value for “Type of Service RTCP”. Default is 46. t1 Valid values are 0 to 63.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Type of Service,DSCP. 2 Select a Protocol field: • “SIP” or • “RTP” or • “RTCP” 3 Enter a value from 0 to 63.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring VLAN (optional) Use the following procedures to configure VLAN on the IP phone. Note: VLAN is disabled by default. When you enable VLAN, the IP phones use the default settings for each VLAN parameter. You can change the default settings if required using the following procedure.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action To set VLAN ID and priority for LAN Port (Port 0): 13 Select Phone VLAN. 14 Select Phone VLAN ID and enter a value from 1 to 4094 to specify the VLAN ID for the LAN Port. Default is 1. 15 Press Done to save the change. 16 Select VLAN Priority. 17 Select one of the following VLAN Protocols: Enter a VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the associated Protocol.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 23 Press Done to save the change. 24 Select PC Port Priority. 25 Select a PC Port VLAN priority value from 0 to 7 for the PC Port. Default is 0. 26 Press Done (4 times) to save the changes. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings Select Restart. D ra f t1 27 4-62 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN. D ra f t1 Step To globally enable/disable VLAN and set priority for non-IP packets: 2 Enable VLAN by checking the VLAN Enable field check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box). 3 With VLAN enabled, select the priority (0 to 7) for non-IP packets in the Priority, Non-IP Packet field.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action To set VLAN ID and priority for the PC Port (Port 1): 6 Enter a VLAN ID value from 1 to 4095 in the VLAN ID field. Default is 1. Note: If you set the PC Port VLAN ID (Port 1) to 4095, all untagged packets are sent to this PC Port. The following is an example of configuring the phone on a VLAN where all untagged packets are sent to the passthrough port.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings RPORT The Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) operates over UDP and TCP. When used with UDP, responses to requests are returned to the source address from which the request came, and returned to the port written into the topmost “Via” header of the request. However, this behavior is not desirable when the client is behind a Network Address Translation (NAT) or firewall.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings Configuring Rport Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure Rport on your phone using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. D ra f t1 1 2 Rport Parameter In the "Advanced Network Settings" section, enable the "Rport (RFC3581" field by checking the check box. (Disable Rport by unchecking the box).
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Network Time Servers Network Time Protocol (NTP) is a protocol that the IP phone uses to synchronize the phone clock time with a computer (configuration server) in the network. To use NTP, you must enable it using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. You can specify up to three time servers in your network. Note: The IP phones support NTP version 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Network Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Enter the IP Address (in dotted decimal) or qualified domain name for the Time Server. 9 Press Done to save the change. Use the following procedure to enable/disable and configure the NTP Servers using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. 2 Enable the "NTP Time Servers" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Network Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 Enter an IP address or qualified domain name in the "Time Server 1", "Time Server 2", and/or "Time Server 3" field(s) to specify the location of the NTP time server. 4 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Global SIP Settings Description The IP phone uses the information in the Global Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) settings to register at the IP PBX. The IP phone configuration defines network and user account parameters that apply globally to all SIP lines. Since not all SIP lines are necessarily hosted using the same IP-PBX/server or user account, additional sets of per-line parameters can also be defined for network and user account.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Basic SIP Settings Specific parameters are configurable on a global and per-line basis. You can also configure specific parameters using the IP Phone UI, the Aastra Web UI, or the configuration files. If you have a proxy server or have a SIP registrar present at a different location than the PBX server, the SIP parameters may need to be changed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Reference For more information about centralized conferencing, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Note: The "sip vmail" and "sip lineN vmail" parameters are configurable using the configuration files only. To configure voicemail see Chapter 5, the section, “Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only)” on page 5-308. Specific sets of SIP parameters are inter-dependent with each other.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Line3 specifies per-line values for proxy IP address and proxy port, so the phone uses those parameter values for SIP calls made on that line. However, because those parameters are part of the SIP network block, the phone does not apply any of the global SIP network block parameters. So even though the global parameters configure a SIP registrar, Line3 on the phone ignores all global network block parameters.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Backup Proxy/Registrar Support The IP phones support a backup SIP proxy and backup SIP registrar feature. If the primary server is unavailable, the phone automatically switches to the backup server allowing the user's phone to remain in service. How it Works All SIP registration messages are sent to the primary registrar first.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings You can configure SRV lookup using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg) only. The parameters to use are: • sip proxy ip • sip proxy port Configuring Basic SIP Network Settings (optional) You can configure SIP settings using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files t1 Note: To configure the SIP settings per-line, use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select SIP Settings. on the phone to enter the Options List. Configuring Proxy IP and Proxy Port Select Proxy IP/Port. 6 Enter an IP address or fully qualified host name in the Proxy Server field. Default is 0.0.0.0.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings IP Phone UI Action 16 Select User Name to enter the username in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone, and for registering the phone at the registrar. Note: The IP phones allow usernames containing dots (“.”). You can also enter the same user name for different registrar and proxy IP addresses. 17 Press Done to save the changes. 18 Select Display Name to enter the name used in the display name field of the "From SIP" header field.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 For global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Settings. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action D ra f t1 Or, for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). To configure SIP authentication settings: 2 4-80 In the "Screen Name" field, enter the screen name that displays on the idle screen. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 In the "Screen Name 2" field, enter the text you want to display on the phone under the “Screen Name” on the idle screen. Notes: 1. If other status messages display on the phone, such as “Network Disconnected”, the Screen Name 2 value does not display. 2. Symbol characters are allowed (such as “#”). 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 9 In the "Line Mode" field, select "Generic" for normal mode, "BroadSoft SCA" for a BroadWorks network, or "Nortel" for a Nortel network. To configure SIP network settings: 10 In the "Proxy Server" field, enter an IP address or fully qualified host name of the SIP proxy server. 11 In the "Proxy Port" field, enter a port number for accessing the SIP proxy server.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 21 To enter a value in the “Conference Server URI” field, see Chapter 5, the section, “Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers)” on page 5-359. 22 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Advanced SIP Settings (optional) Advanced SIP Settings on the IP Phone allow you to configure specific features on the phone. The following table provides a list of Advanced SIP Settings that you can configure using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuration File Parameters ACD Subscription Period (see Chapter 5) sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5) BLA Subscription Period (see Chapter 5) sip acd subscription period (see Chapter 5) Blacklist Duration (see Chapter 6) sip blacklist duration (see Chapter 6) Whitelist Proxy (see Chapter 6) sip whitelist (see Chapter 6) XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6) XML SIP Notify (see Chapter 6) D ra f t1 Aas
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Reference Refer to Appendix A,“Advanced SIP Settings” on page A-92 for a description of each of the above parameters. For more information about Blacklist Duration and Whitelist Proxy, see Chapter 6, “Configuring Advanced Operational Features.” Configuring Advanced SIP Settings Use the following procedures to configure the advanced SIP settings on the IP phone.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Step Action 1 D ra f t1 For Global configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. Or for per-line configuration, click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Enable the "Explicit MWI Subscription" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). If the IP phone has a message waiting subscription with the Service Provider, a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) (LED or display icon) tells the user there is a message on the IP Phone.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 7 If you enable the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription” field, then in the “AS-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, between resubscribing. If the phone does not resubscribe in the time specified for this parameter, it loses subscription. Default is 3600.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 13 In the "Local SIP UDP/TCP Port" field, specify the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5060. For more information about this feature, see the section, “SIP and TLS Source Ports for NAT Traversal” on page 4-37. 14 In the "Local SIP TLS Port" field, specify the local source port (SIPS/TLS) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Default is 5061.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 20 The “BLA Subscription Period” field is enabled by default with a value of 300 seconds. This feature sets the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 23 Enable the "XML SIP Notify" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the check box. Default is disabled). Enabling this parameter allows the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) Settings Real-time Transport Protocol (RTP) is used as the bearer path for voice packets sent over the IP network. Information in the RTP header tells the receiver how to reconstruct the data and describes how the bit streams are packetized (i.e. which codec is in use).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings RTP Port RTP is described in RFC1889. The UDP port used for RTP streams is traditionally an even-numbered port, and the RTCP control is on the next port up. A phone call therefore uses one pair of ports for each media stream. The RTP port is assigned to the first line on the phone, and is then incremented for each subsequent line available within the phone to provided each line a unique RTP port for its own use.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings All Codecs have a sampling rate of 8,000 samples per second, and operate and operate in the 300 Hz to 3,700 Hz audio range. The following table lists the default settings for bit rate, algorithm, packetization time, and silence suppression for each Codec, based on a minimum packet size. Default Codec Settings. Bit Rate Algorithm Packetizatio n Time Silence Suppression G.711 a-law 64 Kb/s PCM 30 ms enabled G.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Silsupp is used to enable or disable silence suppression. Voice Activity Detection (VAD) on the IP phones is used to determine whether each individual packet contains useful speech data. Enabling silsupp results in decreased network bandwidth, by avoiding sending RTP packets for any frame where no voice energy was detected by the VAD.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings DTMF Method A feature on the IP phone allows you to select the DTMF method that the phone uses to send DTMF digits from the IP phone via INFO messages. You can set the DTMF method as Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP), SIP info, or both. You can configure the DTMF method on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings If an SRTP enabled IP phone initiates a call, and the receiving phone is also SRTP enabled, the IP Phone UI displays a “lock” icon, indicating that the call is secure. If the receiving phone does not support SRTP, the IP phone will send unsecured RTP messages instead of SRTP encrypted messages. However in this case, the IP Phone UI does not display the lock icon - indicating a non-secure call.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuring RTP Features Use the following procedures to configure the RTP features on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set for RTP features in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings” on page A-114. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings. Global Settings. ra f t1 Step D Click on Advanced Settings->Line ->RTP Settings. Per-Line Settings. 4-100 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Enter an RTP Port Base in the RTP Port field. Default is 3000. The RTP Port indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router. The RTP port is used for sending DTMF tones and for the audio stream. Your network administrator may close some ports for security reasons.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Step Action 6 Select a method to use from the “DTMF Method” list box. Valid values are RTP, SIP Info, Both. Default is RTP. Note: You can configure the DTMF Method on a global or per-line basis. 7 Select the type of RTP encryption to use from the “RTP Encryption” list box. Valid values are SRTP Disabled, SRTP Preferred, or SRTP Only. Default is SRTP Disabled. Note: You can configure RTP Encryption on a global or per-line basis.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Autodial Settings The IP phones include a feature called “Autodial”. When you configure Autodial on an IP phone, the phone automatically dials a preconfigured number whenever it is off-hook. Depending on the configuration you specify, the Autodial functions as either a “hotline”, or as a “warmline,” as follows: • Hotline (default): The IP phone immediately dials a preconfigured number when you lift the handset.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Configuring AutoDial Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure Autodial using the configuration files: Global Configuration • sip autodial number • sip autodial timeout Per-Line Configuration sip lineN autodial number • sip lineN autodial timeout Configuration Files t1 • D ra f For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Autodial Settings” on page A-119.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Configuring Autodial Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure Autodial using the Aastra Web UI. By default, your IP phone uses the global settings you specify for Autodial for all lines on your IP phone. However, you can also configure Autodial on a per-line basis. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Autodial Settings.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI Per-Line Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Line <1 - 9>->Autodial Settings. 2 Do one of the following actions: 4-106 ra f • To allow this line to use the global autodial settings, click on the Use Global Settings parameter to enable it, then click to save your changes. • To specify a different autodial configuration for this specific line, disable the Use Global Settings parameter. Then proceed to step 3.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Global SIP Settings Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Autodial Timeout” field, specify a value, in seconds, for the timer for this line as follows: • If you want the IP phone to autodial the number immediately (hotline) whenever the IP phone is off-hook, accept the default value of 0. • If you want to specify a length of time for the IP phone to wait before dialing the number, enter the length of time (in seconds).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol Configuration Server Protocol You can download new versions of firmware and configuration files from the configuration server to the IP phone using any of the following types of protocols: TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. For each Protocol, you can specify the path for which the configuration files are located on the server. For HTTP and HTTPS, you can also specify the port number to use for downloading the phone configuration.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu. 3 Enter your Administrator password. Note: The IP Phones accept numeric passwords only. 4 Select Configuration Server. 5 Select Download Protocol. 6 Select from the following: • Use TFTP • Use FTP • Use HTTP • Use HTTPS ra f Default is “Use TFTP”. t1 on the phone to enter the Options List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 Enter the IP address of the protocol server (in dotted decimal format). Use the following table to configure the applicable server. TFTP Settings Select Primary TFTP Enter the IP address or fully qualified domain name of the primary TFTP server. Press Done or Set to save the change. Select Pri TFTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 (Cont’d) HTTP Settings Select HTTP Server Enter the IP address of the HTTP server. Press Done or Set. Select HTTP Path. Enter the path name for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol IP Phone UI Step Action 9 (Cont’d) HTTPS Settings (Continued) - Select HTTPS Server. - Select HTTP->HTTPS. - For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press Change to select “Do not redirect”or “Redirect”. Default is “Do not redirect”. Enabling this feature redirects the HTTP protocol to HTTPS. Press Set. - Select XML HTTP POSTs. t1 - For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Change to select “Yes” and redirect HTTP to HTTPS.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 Select the protocol from the "Download Protocol" list box. Valid values are TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS. Default is TFTP. The IP phone uses the protocol you select to download new firmware and configuration files from the configuration server. Use the following table to configure the applicable server. TFTP t1 - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "TFTP Server" field.
Configuring Network and Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Features Configuration Server Protocol Aastra Web UI Step Action 3 HTTP - Enter an IP address or fully qualified domain name in the "HTTP Server" field. - Enter the path name in the “HTTP Path” field for which the configuration files reside on the HTTP server for downloading to the IP Phone.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Configuration Server Protocol 4-116 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Chapter 5 Configuring Operational Features About this chapter Introduction Topics ra f t1 The IP phones have specific operational features you can configure to customize your IP phone. This chapter describes each feature and provides procedures for configuring your phone to use these features.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 5-50 Local Dial Plan page 5-53 Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls page 5-59 Suppressing DTMF Playback page 5-63 Display DTMF Digits page 5-65 Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone page 5-67 Stuttered Dial Tone page 5-70 XML Beep Support page 5-72 Status Scroll Delay page 5-74 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing page 5-76 Switch Focus to Ringing Line page 5-79 t1 Locking/Unlocking the SAVE and DELETE keys (6753i) page 5-81 Goodbye K
Configuring Operational Features About this chapter Topic Page page 5-178 Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) page 5-184 Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) page 5-188 ACD Subscription Period page 5-198 BLA Subscription Period page 5-200 Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) page 5-202 Do Not Disturb (DND) page 5-211 Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) page 5-222 BLA Support for Third Party Registration page 5-229 P-Preferred Iden
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page XML Key Redirection page 5-352 Options Key Redirection (for Options Menu on all phones and Services Menu on 6751i) page 5-353 XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction page 5-355 XML URI for Key Press Simulation page 5-355 page 5-356 Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments page 5-357 Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) page 5-359 “SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) page 5
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Operational Features Description This section describes the operational features managed and configured by a System Administrator. User Passwords A user or an administrator can change the user passwords on the phone using the configuration files, the IP phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. t1 Use the following procedures to change the user password. ra f Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI 5 Enter the new user password. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Press Enter. 7 Re-enter the new user password. 8 Press Enter. A message, "Password Changed" displays on the screen. t1 6 Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->User Password. 2 In the "Current Password" field, enter the current user password.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Resetting a User Password If a user forgets his password, either the user or an administrator can reset it so a new password can be entered. The reset user password feature resets the password to the factory default which is blank (no password). You can reset a user password using the Aastra Web UI only at the path Operation->Phone Lock. Use the following procedure to reset a user password. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Reset User Password” field, click . t1 The following screen displays: 3 In the “Current Password” field, leave this blank. 4 In the “New Password” field, enter a new password for the user. ra f Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. 5 In the “Password Confirm” field, re-enter the new user password.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Administrator Passwords An administrator can change the administrator passwords on the phone using the configuration files only. Procedure t1 An administrator can also assign a password for using the Options key on the IP phone. You turn this feature on and off by entering the "options password enabled" parameter followed by a valid value in the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone A user or administrator can lock a phone to prevent it from being used or configured. Once the phone is locked, the user or administrator can enter their password to unlock the phone. You can lock/unlock a phone using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. You can use any of the following methods to lock/unlock a phone: Using the IP Phone UI via the “Phone Lock” option in the Options Menu.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the IP Phone UI Use the following IP Phone UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured. IP Phone UI Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Lock. The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays. Press Lock to lock the phone. t1 3 Unlock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Locking/Unlocking the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following Aastra Web UI procedure to lock/unlock an IP phone and prevent it from being used or configured. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 2 D Lock the phone: ra f t1 1 In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click . The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is locked”. Unlock the phone: 3 Click on Operation->Phone Lock.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key Using the Configuration Files Using the configuration files, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the configuration files, you assign the function of the key as “phonelock”. Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring a Lock/Unlock Key using the Aastra Web UI Using the Aastra Web UI, you can configure a key on the phone (softkey, programmable key, expansion module key) to use as a lock/unlock key. In the Aastra Web UI, you assign the function of the as “Phone Lock”. Use the following procedure to configure a key as a lock/unlock key using the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 In the “Type” field, select Phone Lock from the list of options. 4 Click to save your changes. Using the Configured Lock/Unlock Key on the IP Phone After configuring a key as a lock/unlock key, refer to the following procedure to use the key on the IP phone. Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press the LOCK softkey. t1 IP Phone UI Unlock the phone: Press the UNLOCK softkey. D 1 ra f The phone locks.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Defining an Emergency Dial Plan Public telephone networks in countries around the world have a single emergency telephone number (emergency services number), that allows a caller to contact local emergency services for assistance when required. The emergency telephone number may differ from country to country. It is typically a three-digit number so that it can be easily remembered and dialed quickly.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Emergency Dial Plan and Pattern Matching The IP Phones support emergency dialing using pattern matching and prepend dial plan functionality. There are two ways to dial a number on the phone: • dialing digit-by-digit (i.e., select line and dial) • dialing by string (i.e., pre-dial then go off-hook) When a user dials digit-by-digit, the phone adds every digit to a dialed string and checks against the dial plan.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 2 In the “Emergency Dial Plan” field, enter the number used in your local area to contact emergency services. For multiple numbers, enter a “|” between each emergency number. D For example: 911|110. ra f t1 1 Default for this field is "x+#|xx+*". You can enter up to 512 characters in this field. 3 5-18 Click to save the emergency dial plan to your phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Time and Date In addition to enabling/disabling the time server, you can also set the time and date, set the time and date format, set the time zone, and set daylight savings time on the IP phones. You configure these features using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI. The following table identifies which method of configuration applies to each feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Time Zone & DST There are two ways you can set the time zone on the IP Phones. First Method - You can set a time zone using the Time Zone option in the IP Phone UI or you can use the “time zone name” parameter in the configuration files. Both methods allow you to enter a value from the Time Zone table. The list of time zone names is provided in the table in Appendix A, the section, “Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table” on page A-47.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Custom Configuration File Parameter Description Example Absolute Time (not applicable to Eastern Standard Time (EST)) The month that DST starts. Valid values dst start month: 3 are 1 to 12 (January to December). dst end month The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). dst end month: 4 dst [start |end] week Not applicable to absolute time. N/A dst start day The day of the month that DST starts.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Custom Configuration File Parameter dst end week Description Example The week in the specified month in which DST ends. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5. dst end week: -1 1 = first full week of month -1 = last full week of month 2 = second full week of month . . . -5 -= fifth full week of month The day of the specified week in the dst start day: 2 specified month that DST starts on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Example 1 The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using relative time (for EST): time zone name: custom dst [start|end] relative date: 1 #relative time zone minutes: 300 dst minutes: 60 Example 2 The following is an example of a custom time zone configuration in the configuration files using absolute time: DST month: 11 #November week: 1 #first full week day: 1 #Sunday D #End of dst end dst end dst
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Time and Date Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the IP Phone UI. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. Set Time and Time Format: Select Time and Date. 3 Select Set Time. 4 Using the keys on the keypad, enter a time to set on the IP phone. 5 Press Done to save the time you entered.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press Done to save the Date Format. Set Time Zone: 15 Select Time Zone. 16 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press * to display a list of Time Zone options. 17 Select a Time Zone from the list of options. For valid values, see Appendix A, the section, “Time and Date Settings” on page A-45. Note: The default Time Zone is US-Eastern. Press Done to save the Time Zone you selected.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Time and Date Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to set a time and date, time and date format, time zone, and daylight savings time using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting. 2 In the “Time Format” field, select the time format you want to use on your phone. Valid values are: • 12h (12 hour format) (default) • 24h (24 hour format).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Time Servers A time server is a computer server that reads the actual time from a reference clock and distributes this information to the clients in a network. The time server may be a local network time server or an internet time server. The Network Time Protocol (NTP) is the most widely used protocol that distributes and synchronizes time in the network with the time on the time server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 4 Enter the IP address of the Time Server, in dotted decimal format. Use the available softkeys to help you enter the information. 5 Click to save your changes. Setting Time Server Using the Aastra Web UI t1 Use the following procedure to set the Time Server and optionally set the IP Address of Time Servers 1, 2, and/or 3. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Time and Date Setting.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI To set Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3: 3 Note: The “Time Server” field must be enabled to enter values in the “Time Server 1, 2, and 3” fields. In the “Time Server 1”, “Time Server 2”, and/or “Time Server 3” field(s), enter the IP address of the Time Server 1, 2, and/or 3 in your network, in dotted decimal format. Default for this field is 0.0.0.0. For example, 132.234.5.4 Click to save your changes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Backlight Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) The 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT have a backlight feature that allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD: • Off - Backlight is always OFF. • Auto (Default)- Automatically turns ON the backlight when the phone is in use, and then automatically turns OFF the backlight when the phone is idle after a specified length of time.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 4 Select Backlight. Display 1. Contrast Level 2. Backlight - Select Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to select the Backlight status for your phone. Default is “Auto”. Valid options are: • Off • Auto (Default) ra f 5 t1 Done - D Note: Setting the Backlight to “Auto” displays an ADVANCED button for you to set the Auto timer. Backlight Off Auto Cancel Done - 6 If you select “Off”, press Done to save your setting.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 7 If you select “Auto”, press the Advanced softkey to set the automatic timer. Backlight Off Auto Using the keypad, enter the amount of seconds you want the phone to stay backlit when the phone is idle. Valid values are 1 to 120 minutes (2 hours). Default is 10 minutes. When this period of time is reached, the phone turns OFF the backlight. Use the "Backspace" and/or "Clear" softkeys to delete entries if required.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Live Dial Pad* The "Live Dialpad" option on the IP phone turns the Live Dial Pad mode ON or OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed. With live dial pad OFF, if you dial a number while the phone is on-hook, lifting the receiver or initiates a call to that number. pressing the *Availability of feature dependant on your phone system or service provider.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Language The IP phones support several different languages. You can have the IP phone UI and the Aastra Web UI display in a specific language as required. When you set the language to use, all of the display screens (menus, services, options, configuration parameters, etc.) display in that language.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features where is the language code specified in Standard ISO 639 (see Appendix A, the section, Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) on page A-165) and is the country code specified in Standard ISO 3166 (see Country Codes (from Standard ISO 3166) on page A-165). The attribute is optional. Note: Adding/changing language packs can only be done at bootup of the IP phone. The default language (English) cannot be changed or removed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Loading Language Packs via the Aastra Web UI t1 Using the Aastra Web UI, you can specify a language pack to load using the parameters at Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. D ra f You use the following fields in the Aastra Web UI to specify which language packs to load: Once the language pack is loaded to the phone, it is available for selection from either the configuration files, the IP Phone UI or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Specifying the Language to Use Once the language pack(s) have loaded, you must then specify which language to use on the phone. After the phone has booted up, you can specify which language(s) to use. You can use the configuration files and the IP Phone UI to specify the language for the IP Phone UI. You can use the Aastra Web UI to specify the files for the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedures to specify the language to use on the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Language. 3 Select English (English), Français (French), Español (Spanish), Deutsch (German), Italiano (Italian). on the phone to enter the Options List. 4 Press Done to save the changes. t1 Notes: 1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only. 2. All languages may not be available for selection.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. t1 1 2 ra f Loading the Language Pack In the “Language N” fields, enter the file name of the language pack you want to use to display a specific language in the Aastra Web UI. For example, you could enter the following in the “Language 1”, “Language 2”, “Language 3”, and “Language 4” fields to display the Aastra Web UI in French, Spanish, German, and Italian: D lang_de.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Webpage Language” field, select a language to apply to the Aastra Web UI. The IP phone supports the following languages: • • • • • English (default) French (European French and Canadian French) Spanish (European Spanish and Mexican Spanish) German Italian Notes: 1. Valid values for the 6757i CT cordless handset are English, French, and Spanish only. 2. All languages may not be available for selection.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Specifying the Input Language to Use The 5i Series phones support text and character inputs in various languages (English, German, French, Spanish, and Italian). Inputting textual or character information into the IP Phone UI, Aastra Web UI, and XML scripts can now be done in various languages using the keypad on the phone. The System Administrator and User can enable this feature using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features French Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() 2 ABC2ÀÂÇÁÅÆ abc2àâçáåæ 3 DEF3ÉÈÊË def3éèêë 4 GHI4ÎÏ ghi4îï 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6ÑÓÒÔÖ mno6ñóòôö 7 PQRS7 pqrs7 8 TUV8ÚÙÛÜ tuv8úùûü 9 WXYZ9 * * # #/\@ * Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features German Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.:;=_,-'&() 2 ABC2ÄÀ abc2äà 3 DEF3É def3é 4 GHI4 ghi4 5 JKL5 jkl5 6 MNO6Ö mno6ö 7 PQRS7ß pqrs7ß 8 TUV8Ü tuv8ü 9 WXYZ9 * * # #/\@ wxyz9 * #/\@ ra f Italian t1 Key Uppercase Characters Lowercase Characters 0 0 0 1 D Key 1.:;=_,-'&() 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Language Input Using the Configuration Files An Administrator can specify the input language to use by entering a specific parameter in the configuration files. An Administrator must enter the following parameter to enable this feature: • input language Use the following procedures to specify the input language to use on the IP phone.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedure to change the input language using the IP Phone UI. Aastra IP Phone UI Action 1 Press the Options key. 2 Select Language from the Options List. 3 Select Input Language from the Language List. 4 Select the language you want to use on the IP phone for inputting text and characters.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Language Input Using the Aastra Web UI Once “Language Input” is enabled, an Administrator or User can also change the input language on the phone using the Aastra Web UI. The “Input Language” option appears at the path Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings. Use the following procedure to set the input language using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->Language Settings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Language Input for an XML Application A System Administrator can enable input languages in XML applications using the object and the “inputLanguage” attribute.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: If a non-supported value is used with the “inputLanguage” attribute in the XML script, the phone uses the input language that was configured using the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI. If the parameters are not set in the Aastra Web UI or the Phone UI, the phone uses the default of "English".
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Locking IP Phone Keys The IP phones allow you to lock or unlock programmable keys, softkeys, hard keys, cordless handset keys, and expansion keys (for expansion modules). When key locking is enabled, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration. A user cannot override the configuration of a locked key. You can lock and unlock keys using the configuration files, the IP Phone UI, or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: The 9143i and 6753i IP phones prevent users from setting a speed dial key via the Phone UI on a key that has been locked. Locking the IP Phone Keys Use the following procedures to lock the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone. Configuration Files Reference t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys” on page A-226.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features If a System Administrator unlocks the SAVE and DELETE keys, these keys can be configured with the same functions that are available for the other programmable keys. Only the System Administrator can unlock these keys. The Save key allows you to save entries to the Directory and perform a Save-To from the Callers List. It also allows you to save speeddial information to a programmable key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IMPORTANT: If you change the functions of the Save and Delete keys, and then an Administrator locks Keys 1 and 2, the functions are automatically set back to the default settings of "Save" and "Delete". Note: The Save and Delete functions are limited to Key 1 and Key 2 on the 6753i IP phone only. Locking and Unlocking the Save and Delete Keys using the Configuration Files.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Local Dial Plan A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number. Access codes, area codes, specialized codes, and combinations of the number of digits dialed are all part of a dial plan. For instance, the North American Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN) uses a 10-digit dial plan that includes a 3-digit area code and a 7-digit telephone number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The dial plan in the above example can accept any 4-digit dial strings that begin with a '0' or '1', any 5-digit dial strings that begin with a '2' up to '8', any 12-digit dial strings that begin with '91', any non-empty digit string that ends with a '.' or any 2-digit code that begins with a '*'. Prefix Dialing The IP phones support a prefix dialing feature for outgoing calls. You can manually dial a number or dial a number from a list.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features where “9” is the prepended digit, and you dial the following number: 15551212 the IP phone automatically adds the “9” digit to the beginning of the dialed number before the number is forwarded as 915551212. Note: You can configure a local dial plan via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. SIP Dial Plan Terminator t1 The IP phone allows you to enable or disable the use of the “dial plan terminator”.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Secondary Dial Tone The IP phones now support a feature that allows the user to dial a predefined dial string, obtain a dial tone, and continue dialing. A User or Administrator can configure this using the existing Dial Plan feature on the phone. You can enter a new character string in the dial plan that allows you to configure the secondary dial tone. The character string is of the form ".;.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the SIP Local Dial Plan, Dial Plan Terminator, and Digit Timeout Use the following procedures to configure the SIP Local Dial Plan using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Local Dial Plan Settings” on page A-65. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the "Local Dial Plan" field, enter a valid local dial plan (up to 512 alphanumeric characters) for the IP phone. Default is X+#|XX+*. Enter prepended digits or a “;”to present a secondary dial tone if required. D ra f t1 1 Note: If a User enters a dial plan longer than 512 characters, or a parsing error occurs, the phone uses the default dial plan of “x+#|xx+*”.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Park Calls/Pick Up Parked Calls The IP phones (including the 6757i CT handset) have a park and pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature: • Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup) • Using a programmable configuration Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following fields at Basic Settings-> Preferences to configure park/pickup statically: • Park Call • Pickup Call How It displays on the Phone On the IP phone UI, the static configuration method displays the following: • When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the default label of "Park" displays on the first screen of the Phone UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Park /Pickup using Static Configuration (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Use the following procedures to configure the Park/Pickup call feature using the static configuration method. Note: Aastra recommends you configure either the static or the programmable configuration, but not both.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enter a server value in the Park Call field to which incoming live calls will be parked. D ra f t1 1 Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-60. 3 Enter a server value in the "Pickup Parked Call" field. Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-60.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Suppressing DTMF Playback A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable the suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys and programmable keys. When suppression of DTMF playback is disabled, and you press a softkey or programmable key, the IP phone dials the stored number and displays each digit as dialed in the LCD window.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enable the "Suppress DTMF Playback" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your settings. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. 4 Click on Operation->Reset. 5 In the "Restart Phone" field click 5-64 to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Display DTMF Digits A feature on the IP phones allows users and administrators to enable or disable DTMF (dual-tone multi-frequency) digits to display to the IP phone when using the keypad to dial, or when dialing from a softkey or programmable key. DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Enable the "Display DTMF Digits" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your settings. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. 4 Click on Operation->Reset. 5 In the "Restart Phone" field click 5-66 to restart the IP phone and apply the changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Call Waiting/Call Waiting Tone A call waiting feature notifies the user currently on the phone, of a new incoming call. You can disable this call waiting feature, so that the new incoming call is automatically rejected by the phone with a busy message. A User or Administrator can configure this feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Call Waiting Tone You can also enable or disable the playing of a short “Call Waiting Tone" when there is an incoming call on your phone. This feature is enabled by default. If you have Call Waiting enabled, and a call comes into the line for which you are on an active call, a tone is audible to notify you of that incoming call. The tone is also audible to the caller to indicate to that caller you are currently on another call.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features . Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General. 2 The "Call Waiting" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting feature on the IP phone. 3 The "Play Call Waiting Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. This feature allows you to enable or disable the call waiting tone on the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Stuttered Dial Tone You can enable or disable the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone. You can configure this feature using the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. Configuring Stuttered Dial Tone Use the following procedures to configure stuttered dial tone on the IP phones.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The "Stuttered Dial Tone" field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Beep Support The IP phones have a feature that allows you to enable or disable a beep on the phone with it receives a status message from an XML application. This beep can be turned ON or OFF using the Aastra Web UI, the configuration files, or in an XML script. Reference For more information about enabling/disabling the XML Beep Support in an XML script, see “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The “XML Beep Support” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Status Scroll Delay The IP phones have a feature that allows you to specify the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message (including XML status messages) on the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 In the “Status Scroll Delay (seconds)” field, enter a value, in seconds, that each XML status message displays on the phone. Default is 5 seconds. Valid values are 1 to 25. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing You can configure whether or not an incoming call interrupts an outgoing call that is dialing. The “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” (Web UI) parameter or “incoming call cancels dialing” (in config file) parameter controls this feature. How it Works When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), an incoming call interrupts the outgoing call during dialing and allows the phone to ring for the user to answer the incoming call.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Transfer/Conference Call Behavior If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default. If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box. 3 Click 5-78 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Switch Focus to Ringing Line An Administrator or User can control the behavior of the phone when it receives an incoming call when it is already in a connected call. By default, the phone switches focus to the ringing line to enable the user to see who is calling them. You can turn off this functionality so that the phone now stays focused on the connected call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. . D ra f t1 1 “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” Parameter 2 The “Switch Focus to Ringing Line” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 3 Click 5-80 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout An Administrator or User can define a preferred line as well as a preferred timeout. If a preferred line is selected, after a call ends (incoming or outgoing), the display switches back to the preferred line. Next time you go off-hook, you pickup on the preferred line. You can specify the number of seconds it takes for the phone to switch back to the preferred line using the “preferred timeout” parameter.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Phone Feature Preferred Line Behavior caller id If the "Switch UI Focus To Ringing Line" parameter is disabled, the User is able to see the Caller ID when the phone switches the focus to the ringing line. factory default Factory default and recovery mode clears the "preferred line" and "preferred line timeout" parameters, and the phone operates in a non-preferred line mode. Notes: 1.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following parameters to configure preferred line focus using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. ra f Preferred Line t1 1 D Preferred Line Timeout 2 In the “Preferred Line” field, select a preferred line to switch focus to after incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone. Valid values are: • • None (disables the preferred line focus feature) 1 to 9 Default is 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 In the “Preferred Line Timeout” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone switches back to the preferred line after a call (incoming or outgoing) ends on the phone, or after a duration of inactivity on an active line. Default is 0. Valid values are: • Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 4 0 to 999 5-84 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call You can configure the Goodbye key to drop active calls or ignore incoming calls using the “goodbye cancels incoming call” parameter. This parameter controls the behavior of the goodbye key when the phone is on an active call and a second call is presented to the phone. How it Works When you enable this parameter (1 = enable in the configuration files), which is the default, the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing is disabled by default. If required, enable the "Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing" field by checking the check box. 3 Click 5-86 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features UPnP Mapping Lines (for remote phones) Universal Plug and Play (UPnP) is a standard that uses Internet protocols to enable devices to be plugged into a network and automatically know about each other. With UPnP, when a user plugs a device into the network, the device configures itself, acquires a TCP IP address, and uses a discovery protocol based on the Internet's HTTP or HTTPS URL to announce its presence on the network to other devices.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 The "UPnP Mapping Lines" field is set to 0 by default. If required, change the setting to a specific line by selecting a line from the list. Valid values are 0 through 10. The line you select is the line that your remote phone uses to perform Universal Plug and Play on the network you are connecting to. 3 Click 5-88 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Message Waiting Indicator Line A User or Administrator can configure the Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) to illuminate for a specific line or for all lines. For example, if you configure the MWI LED on line 3 only, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on line 3. If you configure the MWI LED for all lines, the LED illuminates if a voice mail is pending on any line on the phone (lines 1 through 9).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings-> Preferences->General. 2 In the “Message Waiting Indicator Line” field, select a single line from 1 to 9, or select “All” for all lines. If you select a single line, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on that line. If you select all lines, the MWI illuminates when a voice mail message is pending on any line from 1 to 9. 3 Click 5-90 D ra f t1 1 to save your changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features DND Key Mode The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone (all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone. • account • phone • custom D 2 DND Key Mode Parameter ra f t1 1 Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Configure a DND key on the phone using the procedures in the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. 4 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Reference For more information, see the section, “Do Not Disturb (DND)” on page 5-211. Call Forward Mode t1 Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to another destination.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • Custom mode - The Custom mode allows you to configure CFWD for a specific account or all accounts. You can configure a specific mode (All, Busy, and/or No Answer) for each account independently or all accounts. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i phones, you can set all accounts to ALL On or ALL Off.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. ra f t1 1 Call Forward Key Mode Parameter D Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still configure Call Forwarding via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account. • • ra f t1 • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) and Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) The IP Phones support Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED). LLDP-MED is designed to allow for things such as: • Auto-discovery of LAN policies (such as VLAN, Layer 2 Priority and Diffserv settings) leading to "plug and play" networking.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table identifies the configuration parameters for LLDP and ELIN and which method you can use to configure each parameter. This table also indicates whether the parameters can be configured by an Administrator, a User, or both.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press Options, and then select Administrator Menu. On the 6751i: Press Services, and then select Options->Administrator Menu. Select Network Settings. 3 Select Ethernet & VLAN. 4 Select LLDP Support. 5 Press CHANGE to toggle the LLDP setting to Enabled or Disabled. t1 2 This field enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure LLDP-MED using the Aastra Web UI: Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Advanced Network Settings. LLDP D ra f t1 LLDP Packet Interval 2 The “LLDP” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. 3 In the “LLDP Packet Interval” field, enter the time, in seconds, between the transmission of LLDP Data Unit (LLDPDU) packets.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Select Basic Settings->Preferences->General. t1 5 The “Use LLDP ELIN” field is enabled by default. To disable LLDP ELIN, click the check mark in the box to clear the check mark. D 6 ra f Use LLDP ELIN This field enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers. 7 Click 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.4 to save your changes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Incoming/Outgoing Intercom with Auto-Answer and Barge In The Intercom feature allows you to press the configured Intercom button on the IP phone and then enter the number you want to call to initiate an intercom call. Intercom calls can be controlled either locally (phone-side) or by the SIP server (server-side). You can configure incoming and outgoing intercom calls on all phone models. A User can configure incoming intercom calls only.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Incoming Intercom Calls You can configure how the phone handles incoming intercom calls. You can receive incoming intercom calls whether or not there are active calls on the phone. The way the phone handles the call depends on the incoming intercom call configuration. The following paragraphs describe the configuration parameters for incoming intercom calls.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Allow Barge In You can configure whether or not the IP phone allows an incoming intercom call to interrupt an active call. The “sip intercom allow barge in” parameter controls this feature.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedures to configure Intercom calls on the IP phone. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for outgoing Intercom, see Appendix A, the section, “Outgoing Intercom Settings” on page A-175. For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for incoming Intercom, see Appendix A, the section, “Incoming Intercom Settings” on page A-177.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 If Phone-Side or Server-Side is selected, select a line from the Line list box for which you want the IP phone to use as its configuration on the Intercom call. Note: The IP phone uses the configuration from the line you select from this list box. The call itself is made using the first available line at the time of the call. 5 Click to save your changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 The "Allow Barge In" field is enabled by default. If an active line on the phone receives an incoming intercom call, the active call is put on hold and the phone automatically answers the incoming intercom call. To disable this field, uncheck the box. 6 Click to save your changes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features How it works After pressing a configured “Paging” key on the phone, the Phone sends RTP to a preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). Any phone in the local network then listens for RTP on the preconfigured multicast address(es) (IP port). For both sending and receiving of the multicast RTP there is no sip signaling involved. The Phone displays the multicast RTP sent/received address(es) to the user.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Group Paging RTP Settings Use the following procedure to configure Group Paging RTP Settings using the configuration files. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page A-179. Use the following procedure to configure RTP streaming for Paging applications using the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 In the “Paging Listen Addresses” text box, enter the multicast IP address(es) and port number on which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets. Note: Enter the IP address in dotted decimal format (for example, 224.0.0.2:10000,239.0.1.20:15000) If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the phone. Click on Softkeys and XML. or Click on Programmable Keys. or Click on Expansion Module Keys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Value” field, enter a multicast IP address(es) and a port number for the Paging key. When you press this key, the phone initiates an outgoing multicast RTP session to the specified address(es) using the specified port. (For example, 224.0.0.2:10000). Note: When you select Paging for the “Type” field, the “Line” field and state fields are disabled. Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Using the Configured Paging Key on the IP Phone The following procedure describes the use of the Paging key. The procedures assumes you have already configured the Paging key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Notes: 1. Recipient of a Paging call can set a global “Do Not Disturb” (DND) to ignore any incoming pages. 2. For incoming Paging, the phones use the Intercom configuration settings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Key Mapping There are hard keys on your phone, such as Hold, Redial, Xfer, and Conf that are configured by default for specific call-handling features. (See the product-specific User Guide for more information about these key functions. Notes: 1. On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT the Xfer and Conf keys are hard-coded by default on keys 5 and 6 to the left of the LCD display and cannot be reassigned.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to enable/disable the Redial, Xfer, and Conf keys. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Mapping Key Settings” on page A-189. Mapping Redial and Conf Keys as Speeddials You can map the Redial and Conference keys on the IP phone to use as speeddial keys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the Key Mapping section, enter a number in the "Map Redial Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the Redial key is pressed. 3 Enter a number in the "Map Conf Key To" field, that the IP phone will use to speeddial when the Conf Key is pressed. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Using Redial Key for “Last Number Redial” The IP phones have an enhanced redial user interface that allows a user to quickly redial the last number that was dialed out from the phone. You can: • Press the REDIAL key twice to redial the last number dialed. • Press the REDIAL key once, scroll the list of numbers, then press the REDIAL button again to dial the number that displays on the screen.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Ring Tones and Tone Sets You can configure ring tones and ring tone sets on the IP phones. Ring Tones There are several distinct ring tones a user or administrator can select from to set on the IP phones. You can enable/disable these ring tones on a global basis or on a per-line basis. The following table identifies the valid settings and default values for each type of configuration method.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuration Method Default Value Global: Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent Global: Tone 1 Per-Line: Global Tone 1 Tone 2 Tone 3 Tone 4 Tone 5 Silent Per-Line: Global D ra f t1 Aastra Web UI Valid Values 5-118 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Ring Tone Sets In addition to ring tones, you can configure ring tone sets on a global-basis on the IP phones. Ring tone sets consist of tones customized for a specific country.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Ring Tones and Tone Sets Use the following procedures to configure ring tones and tone sets on the IP phones. Configuration Files IP Phone UI Step Action For global configuration only: t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for ring tones, see Appendix A, the section, “Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings” on page A-143 or “Ring Tone Per-Line Settings” on page A-145.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. For global configuration: ra f t1 1 In the "Ring Tones" section, select a country from the "Tone Set" field. Valid values are Australia, Europe, France, Germany, Italy, Mexico, UK, and US. Default is US. 3 Select a value from the "Global Ring Tone" field. D 2 Note: See the “Ring Tone Settings Table” on page 5-117 for valid values.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Priority Alerting Priority alerting on the IP phones is a feature that allows incoming calls to trigger pre-defined ringing or call waiting alert tones. You can enable or disable priority alerting on the IP phone for the Asterisk, Broadworks, and Sylantro servers using the configuration files and the Aastra Web UI. Configuration of priority alerting is on a global-basis only.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Sylantro Servers The ring tone keywords that can display in the "Alert-Info" header for a Sylantro server are: Sylantro Server Ring Tone Keywords t1 alert-acd (auto call distribution) alert-community-1 alert-community-2 alert-community-3 alert-community-4 alert-emergency alert-external alert-group alert-internal alert-priority When the ring tone keywords appear in an "Alert-Info" header from a Sylantro server, the keyword is mapped to the ring tone
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features If you enable priority alerting when using a Sylantro server, you can specify the Bellcore tone to be used for the following configurable criteria: Ring Tone Pattern (Sylantro Servers) Call criteria Bellcore tones for each call criteria Normal ringing (default) Bellcore-dr2 Bellcore-dr3 Bellcore-dr4 Bellcore-dr5 Silent t1 alert-acd (auto call distribution) alert-community-1 alert-community-2 alert-community-3 alert-community-4 alert-emergency alert-exter
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features D ra f t1 Note: If the "Do Not Disturb" (DND) or the "Call Forward" (CFWD) feature is enabled on the server-side, and the user is still waiting for a call, the "Bellcore-dr5" is a ring splash tone that reminds the user that these are enabled. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Priority Alerting and Ring Tone Cadences using the Configuration Files Use the following procedures to configure priority alerting and ring tone cadences on the IP phones. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, • “Priority Alert Settings” on page A-155. • “Bellcore Cadence Settings” on page A-160.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to configure Priority Alerting using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences. 2 In the "Priority Alerting Settings" section, enable the "Enable Priority Alerting" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Call Waiting Tones Call Waiting is a feature that tells you if a new caller is trying to contact you when you are already on the phone. A discreet tone alerts you to the new caller, so you can answer your second incoming call by putting your first caller on hold. The IP phones use the following Bellcore-specified call waiting tones.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Directed call pickup is a feature on the phones that allows a user to intercept a call on a ringing phone which is part of the same interception group. You can use the Directed call pickup feature on the phone in two ways: With the existing BLF feature on Asterisk, a user can dial “*76” followed by the extension to pick up a ringing call on another phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF and XML softkeys/programmable keys monitor the states of an extension. The extension states can be one of three states: "busy", "ringing" and "idle". If the monitored extension is in the "ringing" state with an incoming call, and "Directed call pickup" is enabled, pressing the BLF or XML key can pick up the incoming call on the monitored extension. Note: The Asterisk and Epygi Quadro 4x/16x IP PBX servers support this feature.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Notes: 1. The default method for the phone to use is Directed Call Pickup over BLF if the server provides applicable information. If the Directed Call Pickup over BLF information is missing in the messages to the server, the Directed Call Pickup by Prefix method is used if a value for the prefix code exists in the configuration. 2. You can define only one prefix at a time for the entire BLF/List. 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Directed Call Pickup Use the following procedure to enable or disable the Directed Call Pickup feature on the IP phone. Configuration Files To enable/disable Directed Call Pickup on the IP phone using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings” on page A-184. t1 Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Enable the "Play a Ring Splash" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). Default is disabled.) The IP phone plays a short "ring splash" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension. If the "Play a Ring Splash" parameter is enabled, and the host tone is idle, the tone plays a "ring splash". 5 Click to save your changes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure BLF or BLF/List for Directed Call Pickup in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings. 2 Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box. 3 (optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 6 Select a softkey or programmable key to configure. 7 In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks). 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys: In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is BLF). Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead. 9 In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring XML for Directed Call Pickup Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the configuration files. Notes: 1. Before implementing this procedure, you must create an XML application that the phone uses when the XML softkey or programmable key is pressed. This XML application must be entered as a URI in the “Value” field of the XML key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure XML for Directed Call Pickup in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Directed Call Pickup Settings. 2 Enable the "Directed Call Pickup" field by checking the check box. 3 (optional) Enter a prefix in the "Directed Call Pickup Prefix" field. For example, *98. This prefix is appended to the beginning of the Directed Call Pickup number when dialed from the BLF or BLF/List softkey.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Note: Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 6 Select a softkey or programmable key to configure. 7 In the "Type" field, select "XML”.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 9 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone uses to display the XML application to the LCD. For example, http://65.205.71.13/xml/startup/key.php?user=$$SIPREMOTENUMBER$$. Note: For more information about creating an XML script to use with Directed Call Pickup, see Appendix F, the section, “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” on page F-6.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkeys/Programmable Keys/Feature Keys/Expansion Module Keys You can configure the softkeys, programmable keys (9143i and 6753i have programmable keys only), feature keys, and expansion module keys to perform specific functions on the IP phones. Note: When entering definitions for softkeys in the configuration files, the “#” sign must be enclosed in quotes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features State-Based Softkeys (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT only) Users and administrators can configure a specific state to display when a softkey is being used. Available states you can configure for each softkey include: • idle - The phone is not being used. • connected - The current line is in an active call (or the call is on hold) • incoming - The phone is ringing. • outgoing - The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Default States Last Call Return idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Call Forward idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy BLF/Xfer idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Speeddial/Xfer idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Directory idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Callers List idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Intercom idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy Services idle, connected, incoming, outgoing,
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features softkey12 softkey12 softkey12 softkey12 type: speeddial label: voicemail value *89 states: outgoing D ra f t1 Note: The IP phone idle screen condenses the softkeys. So in the previous example, softkey 12 will appear in position 1 if no other softkeys are set. A softkey type of "empty" does not display on the idle screen at all.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuration Example The following example illustrates the use of the "softkeyN states" parameter, and the "softkeyN type" parameter with a value of empty. For clarity purposes, only the "softkeyN type" and "softkeyNstates" parameters are shown.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Programmable Keys (9143i, 6753i, 6755i) The following table provides the number of softkeys and programmable keys you can configure, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Key Functions Table Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Configuration File Parameter Aastra Web UI Parameter Description None none None Indicates not setting for the key. Line line Line Indicates the key is configured for line use. Speeddial speeddial Speeddial Indicates the key is configured for speeddial use. t1 You can configure a softkey to speeddial a specific number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Busy Lamp Field List Configuration File Parameter list Aastra Web UI Parameter BLF/List Description Indicates the key is configured for BLF list use. A user can dial out on a BLF\List configured key. For more information on BLF, see the section “Busy Lamp Field (BLF)” on page 5-169. Auto Call Distribution (For Sylantro Servers) Indicates the key is configured for automatic call distribution (ACD).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Configuration File Parameter Extensible Markup xml Language) (XML) Aastra Web UI Parameter XML Description Indicates the key is configured to accept an XML application for accessing customized XML services. You can also specify a URL for an XML key. For more information on XML, see the section “XML Customized Services” on page 5-311.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Sprecode Configuration File Parameter sprecode Aastra Web UI Parameter Sprecode Description Indicates the key is set to automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the key, *82 automatically activates a service provided by the server. The value you enter for this field is dependent on the services provided by the server.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Speeddial/Xfer Configuration File Parameter speeddial/xfer Aastra Web UI Parameter Speeddial/Xfer Description Indicates the key is set to be used as a speeddial key AND as a Transfer key. For more information about the Speeddial/Xfer feature, see the section “BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys” on page 5-178.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Conference Configuration File Parameter conf Aastra Web UI Parameter Conference (Applicable to the 6753i only) Description Indicates the key is configured as a conference key (for local conferencing). (For Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) An Administrator can also enable centralized conferencing on the IP Phones. For more information about using the Conference key, see your Model-specific User’s Guide.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Softkey/ Programmable Key Function Paging Configuration File Parameter paging Aastra Web UI Parameter Paging Description Indicates the softkey is set for Group Paging on the phone. Pressing this key automatically sends a Real Time Transport Protocol (RTP) stream to pre-configured multicast address(es) without involving SIP signaling. For more information about the Paging key, see “Group Paging RTP Settings” on page 5-107.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Softkeys and Programmable Keys Use the following procedures to configure the softkeys and programmable keys on the IP phone. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 5-154 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key to configure. For Softkeys and Expansion Module Keys: 3 In the "Type" field, select the type of softkey you want to configure.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 If applicable, in the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey. For example, for a speeddial value, you can enter a number you want to use for the speeddial key, or 12345+ as a speeddial prefix. 6 If applicable, in the "Line" field, select the line for which you want to associate the softkey. 7 Some softkey types allow you to configure specific operational states.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features 6757i Cordless (CT) Feature Keys In addition to the softkeys on the 6757i CT, this phone also has handset keys you can configure with specific features. You can use the Aastra Web UI to configure the handset keys. Note: You configure the handset keys using the Aastra Web UI (Operation->Handset Keys) or by pressing the "F" button on the handset.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Feature Key Programming Guidelines The following are guidelines to use when programming the feature keys on the handset: All handsets paired with the same Base Station have the same programmed functions since the web interface applies the functions to all the handsets paired with that base.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Handset Feature Key Functions You can configure the features keys on the 6757i CT handset to perform specific functions using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.The following table identifies the available functions for the feature keys on the 6757i CT handset. The following Handset Key Functions Table lists the available functions for the keys on the 6757i CT IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Feature Key Function Transfer Configuration File Parameter xfer Aastra Web UI Parameter Xfer Description Indicates the key is configured as a transfer key for transferring calls. For more information about the Xfer key, see your Aastra IP Phone 6757i CT User’s Guide. Park park Park Indicates the key is set to be used as a park key to park an incoming call. For more information on park, see the section “Park/Pick Up Key” on page 5-234.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Feature Key Function Public Configuration File Parameter public Aastra Web UI Parameter Public Description Indicates the key is configured to toggle from public to private mode. A public and private key can be used when at a line item in the Directory List. The Private key toggles a number in the Directory List to private. The Public key allows a number in the Directory List to be sent to the handsets.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Handset Feature Keys You can program up to 15 feature keys on the 6757i CT IP phone using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to program the feature keys on your 6757i CT Base Station and all paired handsets. Use the following procedures to configure the IP phone handset feature keys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Handset Keys. 2 Select the handset key you want to program. 3 Select the function for that handset key from the "Key Function" field. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save the function you selected to the handset key. The key programming information is sent to the 6757i Base Station and to all the cordless handsets associated with that Base Station. Any key programmed to "None" does not appear in the handset’s list.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizing the Key Type List in the Aastra Web UI An Administrator can configure which key types display in the Aastra Web UI list for a Softkey, Programmable Key, Expansion Module Key, and/or Feature Key (CT Models). Currently, in the Aastra Web UI for a phone, you can select a type of key from a list of approximately 26 key types to assign to a softkey, programmable key, expansion module key, and/or feature key.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features t1 Example of a List of Configured Keys Types (None, Line, XML, Empty) In addition to being able to specify which key types display in the list, the Administrator can also determine in which order the key types display.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Notes: 1. Any key types configured that do not apply to the phone are ignored. 2. The SAVE and DELETE keys appear by default as Keys 1 and 2 on the 6753i and 9143i, unless specifically allowed by the Administrator to be configurable. 3. An Administrator must use the English value when configuring the key types in the configuration files. 5.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Speeddial Prefixes The normal function of the speeddial option allows you to configure a specific key on the phone to dial a number quickly by pressing the configured key. For example, if you had the following speeddial configuration in the configuration files: softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 softkey1 type: speeddial label: Office value: 5552345 line: 1 after you press softkey1 on the phone, it dials the Office number at 555-2345 on line 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add or Edit a Speeddial Key The IP Phones allow you to set a parameter, “speeddial edit” using the configuration files that allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a speeddial key or edit a speeddial key from the IP Phone UI. Disabling this parameter prevents a user from adding or editing a speeddial key.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Busy Lamp Field (BLF) The BLF feature on the IP phones allows a specific extension to be monitored for state changes. BLF monitors the status (busy or idle) of extensions on the IP phone. Note: The BLF setting is applicable to the Asterisk server only. Example t1 A Supervisor configures BLFs on his phone for monitoring the status of a worker’s phone use (busy or idle).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF\List Setting (For use with the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 or higher platform only) The BLF\List feature on the IP phones is specifically designed to support the BroadSoft Broadworks Rel 13 Busy Lamp Field feature. This feature allows the IP phone to subscribe to a list of monitored users defined through the BroadWorks web portal. In addition to monitoring the idle and busy state, the BLF\List feature also supports the ringing state.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features D ra f t1 On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i running Broadsoft firmware, the programmable key LEDs illuminate either flashing, solid, or turn off depending on the state of those extensions. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Asterisk BLF Configuration You can enable the BLF feature on Asterisk to enable monitoring for specific extensions. BLF on Asterisk is possible through the “hint” extension parameter. Add the following in the Asterisk extensions.conf file for each target extension being monitored. For example: exten -> 9995551212,hint,SIP/9995551212 Add the following in the Asterisk sip.conf file for each subscriber if it is not defined already.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring BLFs Use the following procedures to configure BLF and BLF\List on the IP phone. Configuration Files To set BLF or BLF\List in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the sections, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. “BLF List URI Settings” on page A-230. D ra f t1 • • 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6757i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a softkey, programmable, or expansion module key to configure. 3 In the "Type" field, select "BLF" (Asterisk), "BLF\List" (BroadSoft BroadWorks).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT softkeys: In the "Label" field, enter the name of the person who’s extension you are monitoring (if “Type” is BLF). Note: If BLF\List type is selected, no label value is required. The BroadWorks BLF List name is configured in the "BLF List URI" field instead. 5 In the "Value" field, enter a value to associate with the softkey or programmable key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF Subscription Period On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the BLF subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to set the BLF subscription period: sip blf subscription period: The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1 hour).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "BLF Subscription Period" field. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer Keys The IP Phones have a transfer (Xfer) enhancement feature you can use with the BLF and Speeddial keys - BLF/Xfer and Speeddial/Xfer. The BLF key allows one or more extensions to be monitored, and once there is any state change with those extensions, the key shows the status of the monitored lines. The Xfer key allows a call to be transferred to other recipients blindly or consultatively.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLF/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality • BLF/Xfer and BLF A BLF/Xfer key can be configured for subscribing to an extension and monitor the status of the extension, similar to the BLF key functionality. Changes of the state of the monitored extension are indicated by a LED / Icon.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Speeddial/Xfer Key Requirements and Functionality The Speeddial/Xfer key has the following capabilities: • Speeddial/Xfer and Speeddial When the phone is in the “Idle” state, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key causes the phone to go offhook and dial the predefined extension. • Speeddial/Xfer and Blind Transfer When the phone is connected to a call, pressing the Speeddial/Xfer key blind transfers the call to the predefined target.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters in the configuration files to configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or Speeddial/Xfer key on the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the BLF/Xfer Key and the Speeddial/Xfer Key Using the Aastra Web UI You configure the BLF/Xfer key and/or the Speeddial/Xfer Key on the IP phone similar to configuring a BLF key or speeddial key using the Aastra Web UI. Use the following procedure to configure BLF/Xfer and/or Speeddial/Xfer. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. or Click on Operation->Expansion Keys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI ra f t1 Top Keys Tab (6757i example) Choose a key that you want to assign the BLF/Xfer key or a Speeddial/Xfer key to, and select BLF/ Xfer or Speeddial/Xfer from the “Type” field. 3 In the “Label” field, enter a key label to assign to the BLF/Xfer key (for example, “BX35”). 4 In the “Value” field, enter the monitored extension (for example, “35”).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Speeddial/Conference Key (not applicable to the 6751i) The IP Phones allow you to configure a softkey/programmable key/expansion module key to be used as a speeddial conference key (Speeddial/Conf key) while remaining in the current call. This key allows a user on a call, to conference another party at a pre-defined number while remaining in the conference.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Configuration Files To configure the Speeddial/Conf key using the configuration files, you enter “speeddialconf” for the key type.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the Speeddial/Conf Key Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Speeddial/Conf Key using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Sottkeys and XML. or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. or Click on Operation->Expansion Module Keys. D ra f Speeddial/Conf Option t1 1 2 In the “Type” field, select Speeddial/Conf from the list of options.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 For phones with softkeys: In the States field, select the state(s) (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for which you want to use on the key. Note: States are not applicable to programmable keys (6753i, 9143i). Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) (for Sylantro Servers) The IP phones support an Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature for Sylantro servers. The ACD feature allows the Sylantro server to distribute calls from a queue to registered IP phone users (agents). To use the ACD feature on an IP phone, the administrator must first configure an an ACD softkey or programmable key.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features ACD Auto-Available Timer Whenever the IP phone user answers a call, or misses a call, the server automatically changes the phone’s status to unavailable. The administrator can control how long the IP phone remains in the unavailable state by configuring an auto-available timer. When the timer expires, the IP phone status is automatically changed to available. The default setting for the timer is 60 seconds.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer. Configuration Files D ra f t1 To configure the ACD Auto-Available Timer using the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings” on page A-186. 5-190 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring an ACD Key Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure an ACD softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key using the Aastra Web UI. This procedure uses the 6755i IP phone as an example. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Line” field, select the line which the IP phone uses to subscribe to the queue. For example: Line 1 5 Click to save your changes. Configuring the ACD Auto-Available Timer Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure an ACD auto-available timer using the Aastra Web UI. t1 Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->Auto Call Distribution Settings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the ACD Feature on your IP Phone The ACD feature allows you to login to a phone queue in order to receive distributed calls on your IP phone. To login to a phone queue, your system administrator must preconfigure an ACD softkey or programmable key on your Aastra IP phone. For models 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT, the ACD softkey is labeled according to your network requirements.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features This icon changes when you log on to the phone queue and are available to take calls. The icon changes again when you are busy with an active call.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Logging In to a Phone Queue (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the ACD softkey on your IP phone. Note: Check with your administrator to verify the label assigned to the ACD softkey on your IP phone. t1 The login screen (see below) appears.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Press the Log In softkey. You are logged into the phone queue. Once you log in, examine the IP Phone UI, and note the following information: If your IP phone status is set to “available” then the server will begin to distribute phone calls from this queue to your IP phone.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Logging In To a Phone Queue (6753i and 9143i) Use the following procedure to log into a phone queue from your Aastra IP phone. Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the ACD programmable key on your IP phone. 2 To login to the phone queue, use your IP phone keypad to enter the following information: User ID: The phone number you use to access the queue. Password: The password you use to access this queue. Select Login.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features ACD Subscription Period On the IP phones, you can set the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the ACD subscription service after a software/firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone. In the configuration files, you enter the following parameter with a valid value to set the ACD subscription period: sip acd subscription period: The minimum value for this 120 seconds (2 minutes). The default is 3600 (1 hour).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 Enter a value, in seconds, from 120 (2 min) to 3600 (1 hour) in the "ACD Subscription Period" field. 3 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features BLA Subscription Period The IP Phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription period. If this parameter is set to zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified in the Subscribe message received from the server, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the “BLA Subscription Period” field, enter a value, in seconds, that the phone waits to receive a BLA subscribe message from the server. If you specify zero (0), the phone uses the value specified for the BLA expiration in the subscribe message received from the server. If no value is specified, the phone uses the default value of 300 seconds.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup (for Sylantro Servers) Aastra IP phones and any attached Expansion Modules support the Directed Call Pickup (DCP) and Group Call Pickup (GCP) features. The Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup feature allows you to intercept - or pickup - a call on a monitored extension. An Administrator or User can configure this feature using the Aastra Web UI to create a DCP or GCP softkey on the IP phone.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring DCP/GCP Using the Configuration Files (for Sylantro Servers) Use the following procedures to configure DCP/GCP using the configuration files. Configuration Files D ra f t1 To set DCP/GCP in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/ Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Directed Call Pickup (DCP) Using the Aastra Web UI (for Sylantro Servers) D ra f t1 Use the following procedure to configure Directed Call Pickup using the Aastra 5-204 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Web UI. This procedure uses the 6757i IP Phone as an example. Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key for which to configure Directed Call Pickup. 3 In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey. For example: DCP2200 5 In the “Value” field, specify the extension you want to intercept when you press this softkey. For example: 2200 Click to save your changes. D ra f t1 6 5-206 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Group Call Pickup (GCP) Using the Aastra Web UI (for Sylantro Servers) Use the following procedure to configure Group Call Pickup using the Aastra Web UI. D ra f t1 Note: A ring group must be configured on the Sylantro Server in order for a GCP softkey to function. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys or Click on Operation->Expansion Module . D ra f t1 Depending on your phone-model, the key configuration screen displays. The 6755i Key Screen is shown as an example. 2 Select a key for which to configure Group Call Pickup. 3 In the “Type” field, select Directed Call Pickup. 4 In the “Label” field, specify a name for this Directed Call Pickup softkey.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the “Value” field, enter groupcallpickup. 6 Click to save your changes. Using Directed Call Pickup/Group Call Pickup Use the following procedure for the DCP/GCP on your phone. t1 Note: Before using the DCP/GCP feature on your phone, you must first configure the DCP or GCP key. You must identify the extension(s) or phone number(s) you want to monitor when configuring the key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 2 If the monitored extension receives multiple incoming calls simultaneously, the phone displays a list of incoming calls. 3 Select a call from this list using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. Press the "Pickup" softkey to answer the call you selected. = Cancel D ra f Press the Pickup key to answer the call DCP on line: 1. 2201 = Pickup t1 Select an extension 5-210 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Do Not Disturb (DND) The IP phones have a feature you can enable called "Do not Disturb (DND). An Administrator or User can set “do not disturb” based on the accounts on the phone (all accounts or a specific account). You can set specific modes for the way you want the phone to handle DND.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following describes the DND key behavior for each DND mode. • Account - DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF if DND enabled for that account. • Phone - DND key toggles all accounts on the phone to ON or OFF. • Custom - DND key displays custom screens on the IP Phone UI. User can select whether to enable/disable DND per account, enable DND on all accounts, or disable DND on all accounts.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring DND Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure DND on the IP Phone: • dnd key mode • softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type • softkeyN states (optional) Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring DND Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure DND mode using the Aastra Web UI: Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. 2 DND Key Mode Parameter D ra f t1 1 In the “DND Key Mode” field, select a “do not disturb” (DND) mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Phone. • account • phone • custom Sets DND for a specific account.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration. 5 For each account, enable DND by placing a check mark in the box. Disable DND by unchecking the box. D ra f t1 4 Notes: 1. If you selected “Account” or “Custom” mode in step 2, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 Click to save your changes. The change takes effect immediately without a reboot. Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML; or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys; or Click on Operation->Expansion Module. D ra f t1 7 Softkeys 1 and 2 configured for DND Note: If there is no DND key configured or if it is removed, DND is disabled on the IP Phone. 8 5-216 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using DND Modes via the IP Phone UI If you add a DND key using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can toggle the DND state using the IP Phone UI. Use the following procedure to enable/disable DND on the IP Phone. The following procedure assumes you have already configured a DND key AND assumes there are three accounts configured on the phone. Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Account Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: With the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for the account. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Phone Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: Press the DND key to toggle DND ON or OFF for all accounts on the phone. Toggling to ON enables DND on all accounts on the phone. Toggling to OFF disables DND on all accounts on the phone. Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Custom Mode On the 9143i, 6751i and 6753i: Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the accounts. Indicates DND Off DND X 2. Screenname2 Change Done ra f Indicates DND On DND 4. All Off Done Set DND 5. All On Done Set t1 DND 1.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action DND in Custom Mode (continued) On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Press the DND key on the phone. The screen displays a list of the accounts on the phone and allows you to enable/disable a specific account or all accounts. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through the accounts. Services Dir Callers t1 DND 1. Screenname1 2. Screenname2 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Bridged Line Appearance (BLA) A SIP bridge line appearance (BLA) on the IP phones allows multiple devices to share a single directory address (DA). For example, people working at a technical support department could be located in different places. If their desktop phones are configured for BLA DA, when customer calls come in, all the phones with the BLA DA would ring but the call can only be answered by one of them.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features The following table shows the number of lines that can be set to BLA for each model phone. IP Phone Model Possible # of BLA Lines 9143i 9 9480i 9 9480i CT 9 6751i N/A 6753i 9 6755i 9 9 9 Configuring BLA t1 6757i 6757i CT ra f You can configure BLA on a global or per-line basis using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Per-Line BLA You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the configuration files using the following parameters: sip lineN mode sip lineN username sip lineN bla number You configure BLA on a per-line basis in the Aastra Web UI using the following fields at Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru Line 9: • Line Mode • Phone Number • BLA Number ra f For Sylantro Server t1 Sylantro servers and ININ servers require specific configuration methods for per-line conf
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features For ININ Server When configuring the BLA feature on an ININ server, the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter without the incremented digit added to the phone #. For example, if the sip lineN user name for the first phone is 10101, and the sip lineN user name for the second phone is 10102, etc.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 1 For global configuration of BLA: D ra f t1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Authentication Settings. 5-226 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For per-line configuration of BLA: D ra f t1 Click on Advanced Settings->Line N (1-9). In the "Line Mode" field, select the BLA option. 2 In the "Phone Number" field, enter the phone number of the IP phone. 3 For global configuration of BLA: In the "BLA Number" field, enter the Bridge Line Appearance (BLA) number to be shared across all IP phones.
BLA Subscription Period The phones include a SIP BLA subscription period parameter that allows an Administrator to set the amount of time, in seconds, of the BLA subscription period. Reference For more information about setting the BLA Subscription Period, see the section, “BLA Subscription Period” on page 5-200.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLA Support for Third Party Registration BLA allows an Address Of Record (AOR) to be assigned onto different line appearances for a group of SIP user agents (IP phones). When a call is made to this BLA number, the call is offered to all user agents that have mapping to this BLA. To support this, the IP phones need to support third party registration for the BLA along with the registration for its own primary appearance number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features #Alice phone number sip line2 bla number:4085582868 sip line2 display name:Alice sip line2 screen name:Alice Alice’s configuration is as follows: #line 1 sip sip sip sip sip sip line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 line1 auth name:4085582868 password: mode: 3 user name:4085582868 display name: Alice screen name: Alice t1 P-Preferred Identity Header for BLA Accounts ra f The IP Phones support the BLA specification, draft-anil-sipping-bla-02, which states tha
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features BLA Support for Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) The IP Phones have an option for a Busy Line Appearance (BLA) configured line to send a SUBSCRIBE SIP message for a Message Waiting Indicator (MWI). t1 Notes: 1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect. 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring BLA Support for MWI Using the Configuration Files Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “BLA Support for MWI” on page A-87. Configuring BLA Support for MWI using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure BLA support for MWI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The “MWI for BLA Account” field is disabled by default. To enable this feature, place a checkmark in the “Enabled” box. Notes: 1. If you change the setting on this parameter, you must reboot the phone for it to take affect. 2. Both the “sip explicit mwi subscription” and “sip mwi for bla account” parameters must be enabled in order for the MWI subscription for BLA to occur. 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Park/Pick Up Key The IP phones (including the 6757i CT and 9480i CT handsets) have a park and pickup call feature that allows you to park a call and pickup a call when required. There are two ways a user or administrator can configure this feature: • Using a static configuration (globally configures park and pickup) • Using a programmable configuration (using a key) Note: The IP phones accept both methods of configuration.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features On 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT On the IP phone UI, the Park/Pickup feature displays the following: When a call comes in, and you pickup the handset, the custom label that you configured for the Park softkey displays on the Phone UI. • After the call is parked, the label that you configured for the Pickup softkey displays on other phones in the network.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Park/Pickup Key Using Configuration Files In the configuration files, you configure Park/Pickup using the key parameters. You must specify the "softkeyN value", "prgkeyN value", “topsoftkeyN value“, or “expmodX keyN value”. The following examples show Park/Pickup configurations using specific servers.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Model 6753i and 9143i Examples Server Park Configuration Pickup Configuration prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: asterisk;70 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: asterisk;70 prgkeyN line: 1 Sylantro prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: sylantro;*98 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN value: sylantro;*99 prgkeyN line: 1 BroadWorks prgkeyN type: park prgkeyN value: broadworks;*68 prgkeyN line: 1 prgkeyN type: pickup prgkeyN
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring a Park/Pickup Key Using Aastra Web UI On the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT, you configure a Park and/or Pickup key at Operation->Softkeys and XML. You enter a key label, and value for a specific line on the phone. The default state of the Park configuration is "connected". The default state of the Pickup configuration is "idle, outgoing".
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i/6757i CT and 9480i/9480i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Pick a softkey to configure for Parking a call. 3 In the "Type" field, select Park. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label for the Park softkey. 5 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 11 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238. 12 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the Pickup configuration. 13 The pickup softkey has a default state of “Idle” and “Outgoing”. Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6753i and 9143i: 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen 2 Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Parking a call. 3 In the "Hard Key" field, select Park. 4 In the "Value" field, enter the appropriate value based on the server in your network. 5 D Note: For values to enter in this field, see the table “Park/Pickup Call Server Configuration Values” on page 5-238.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 10 Click to save your changes. You must restart your IP phone for the changes to take affect. Click on Operation->Reset. 12 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone and apply the changes. D ra f t1 11 5-242 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the Park Call/Pickup Parked Call Feature Use the following procedures on the IP phones to park a call and pick up a parked call. IP Phone UI Step Action Parking a Call 1 While on a live call, press the "Park" softkey. 2 Perform the following for your specific server: For Asterisk Server: t1 - Server announces the extension number where the call has been parked. Once the call is parked, press the y key to complete parking.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Enter the extension number where the call was parked. 6 Press the "Pickup" softkey. D ra f t1 If the call pick up is successful, you are connected with the parked call. 5-244 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Last Call Return (lcr) (Sylantro Servers) Last call return (lcr) allows an administrator or user to configure a "last call return" function on a softkey or programmable key. This feature is for Sylantro servers only. You can configure the “lcr” softkey feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i/6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Pick a softkey to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Type" field, select lcr. 4 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the last call return configuration. 5 The lcr softkey has a default state of “Idle”, “Connected”, “Incoming”, “Outgoing”. Leave these states enabled or to disable, uncheck the check boxes as required.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6757i CT Handset: Click on Operation->Handset Keys. 2 Pick a handset key to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Key Function" field, select lcr. 4 Click D ra f t1 1 to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 6753i and 9143i 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen Pick a hard key (from keys 3 through 6) to configure for Last Call Return. 3 In the "Type" field, select lcr. 4 For the 6753i and 9143i: D 2 In the "Line" field, select a line for which to apply the lcr configuration. 5 5-248 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Call Forwarding Call Forward (CFWD) on the IP phone allows incoming calls to be forwarded to another destination. The phone sends the SIP message to the SIP proxy, which then forwards the call to the assigned destination. An Administrator or User can configure CFWD on the phone-side by setting a mode for the phone to use (Account, Phone, or Custom).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table describes the key and Message Waiting Indicator (MWI) LEDs when you enable CFWD on the IP Phone. Key LED Behavior for All Modes MWI LED Behavior for All Modes CFWD key LED RED if CFWD All, CFWD MWI LED ON if current account in focus has Busy, or CFWD No Answer is enabled for CFWD ALL enabled. the account in focus. MWI LED OFF if CFWD All is disabled. CFWD key LED OFF if any CFWD mode is disabled.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Call Forwarding You use the following parameters to set CFWD on the IP Phone using the configuration files: • • • call forward key mode softkeyN type, topsoftkeyN type, prgkeyN type, or expmodX keyN type softkeyN states (optional) Notes: 1. If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. t1 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features : Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML; or Click on Operation->Programmable Keys; or Click on Operation->Expansion Module. D ra f t1 1 Softkey 2 configured for CFWD 2 5-252 Click to save your changes. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Preferences->General. Call Forward Key Mode Parameter ra f t1 3 D Note: If there is no CFWD key configured on the phone or it is removed, you can still set the CFWD modes via the IP Phone UI at the path Options->Call Forward. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “Call Forward Key Mode” field, select a call forward mode to use on the phone. Valid values are: Account, Phone, Custom. Default is Account. • • ra f t1 • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Basic Settings->Account Configuration. 7 For each account, enable CFWD state by placing a check mark in one or more of the following “State” fields: • • • D ra f t1 6 All Busy No Answer The “All” option forwards all incoming calls for this account to the specified phone number regardless of the state of the phone. The phone can be in the Busy or No Answer states, or can be in the idle state.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 For each account, in the “Number” field, enter the phone number for which you want the incoming calls to forward to if the phone is in the specified state. If using the “Account” mode or “Custom” mode, you can enter different phone numbers for each account. Notes: 1. If you selected “Account” mode in step 4, you can enable/disable each account or all accounts as applicable. You can enter different phone number for each enabled state.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using CFWD Modes via the IP Phone UI If you enable/disable CFWD using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI, you can use the CFWD screens that display to the IP Phone UI. You can access the CFWD parameters by pressing a configured CFWD key (if previously configured) OR by pressing Options->Call Forward on the phone’s front panel.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Account Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 2 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname2 Jan 1 12:96 Screenname3 CFWD Busy Jan 1 12:96 Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. Cfwd Mode 1.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account: All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD Number Screen 2. Cfwd Number Done Change Change Cfwd Number __ Cancel Set Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, In the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. D ra f t1 All changes are saved to the phone. 5-262 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Phone Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 2 Screenname2 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 3 Screenname3 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 t1 In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone. All three accounts have CFWD enabled as indicated by the “CFWD All” message.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 2 Press the Call Forward key. The Call Forward Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state type. Change ! Cfwd Mode 3. NoAns Done Change Cfwd Mode 4. All Off Done Set Cfwd Mode 5. All On Done Set D Indicates CFWD NoAns enabled Cfwd Mode 2. Busy Done t1 Indicates no CFWD phone number configured for Busy Change ra f Indicates CFWD ALL enabled Cfwd Mode 1.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states. However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone. All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF. 6 Press the SET key to save the change. 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All to view t1 Use CFWD Number Screen Change ra f 1. Cfwd State On Done 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 14 Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. D ra f t1 All the same changes are saved to all accounts on the phone. 5-268 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Custom Mode (9143i, 6751i, and 6753i) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. 1 Screenname1 CFWD All Jan 1 12:96 2 3 Screenname2 CFWD Busy Jan 1 12:96 Screenname3 CFWD NoAns Jan 1 12:96 t1 In the above example, Screenname1, Screenname2, and Screenname3, are three accounts configured on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 2 Select an account to configure. Press the CHANGE key. The CFWD Mode screen displays. Use the UP and DOWN arrow keys to scroll through each state screen. Change Cfwd Mode 3. NoAns Done ! Change Cfwd Mode 4. All Off Done Set Cfwd Mode 5. All On Done Set D Indicates CFWD NoAns enabled Cfwd Mode 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with individual configurations): All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. Press NEXT to toggle the state of the CFWD state ON or OFF. In the example in Step 4, you press NEXT to change the option to OFF. 6 Press the SET key to save the change. 7 In the CFWD State screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD Number screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd All to view t1 Use CFWD Number Screen Change ra f 1. Cfwd State On Done 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 10 For the CFWD No Answer state, in the CFWD Number screen, press the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the CFWD No. Rings screen and press CHANGE. 1. Cfwd NoAns Use to view Change t1 1. Cfwd State On Done CFWD No. Rings Screen 2. Cfwd Number Change ra f Done 3. No. Rings Done No. Rings 1 Next Set Press the NEXT key to select the number of rings to apply to the phone for call forwarding incoming calls.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 13 Press DONE to save CFWD All Number, CFWD All State, CFWD Busy Number, CFWD Busy State, CFWD No Answer Number, CFWD No Answer State, CFWD No Answer Rings. Each time you press DONE, the following “Apply Changes” screen displays. Apply Changes? 0 Cancel # Confirm Press # to confirm the change(s) each time the “Apply Changes” screen displays. t1 14 D ra f All changes are saved to the phone for all accounts.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features . Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Account Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account. Services Dir Callers L1 Screenname1 Services Dir Callers L2 Screenname2 Services Dir Callers L3 Screenname3 CFWD All Tues Jan1 10:00am CFWD Busy Tues Jan1 10:00am Tues Jan1 10:00am t1 1 - Call Fwd - Call Fwd - Call Fwd Press the Call Forward key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the account(s) in focus using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for an account: All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 For the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Services Dir Callers Change D Change the State Services Dir Callers ra f Call Forward State Screen Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Phone Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select a state for the phone using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable a specific account on the phone with any or all of the following states. However, the configuration you set will apply to all accounts on the phone. All - Enables CFWD All on the phone and forwards all incoming calls to the specified number.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 In the CFWD No Answer state, press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 2. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Change Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212__ No. Rings: 1 - Backspace Cancel Done - D ra f Call Forward State Screen Services Dir Callers Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “Number” field. Enter a phone number to apply to the current state in focus. When the phone is in the state you specified, and a call comes into the phone, it forwards the call to the number you specify. Use the BACKSPACE key if required to delete characters. 7 Use the DOWN arrow key to scroll to the “No. Rings” field.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action CFWD in Custom Mode (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT) 1 Use the RIGHT and LEFT arrow keys to scroll through each account.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 Select an account using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can also use the following keys if required: All Off Key- Disables CFWD for all accounts on the phone. All On Key - Enables CFWD for all accounts on the phone. t1 CopytoAll Key - Copies all settings for the account you select, to all other accounts on the Call Forward Account screen.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 5 Select a state for the selected account(s) using the UP and DOWN arrow keys. You can enable/disable any or all of the following states for a specific account or for all accounts (with individual configurations): All - Enables CFWD All for an account and forwards all incoming calls for that account, to the specified number. The phone number can be different between accounts.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 6 Press the CHANGE key for the mode you selected in step 4. This displays the Call Forward State screen. In the following example, the CFWD All state is ON. Services Dir Callers Change D Change the State Services Dir Callers ra f Call Forward State Screen Call Forward Mode NoAns State: Off Number: 5551212 No.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 7 Press the CHANGE key in the CFWD State screen. With the cursor in the “State” field, toggle the state ON and OFF by pressing the CHANGE key. Note: You can press the AllAccts key to copy the settings in the current Call Forward Settings screen for a specific call forward mode, to every account on the phone. Every account will have the same settings for that call forward mode.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Callers List The IP phones have a "Callers List" feature that store the name, phone number, and incremental calls, for each call received by the phone. The following illustrations show the default location of the Callers List Key on each type of phone model.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Callers List Key 6753i ra f t1 6755i D 6757i/6757i CT You can enable and disable the Callers List feature using the configuration files. When disabled, the Callers List does not display on the IP phone UI and the Caller List key is ignored when pressed. When enabled, you can view, scroll, and delete line items in the Callers List from the IP phone UI. You can also directly dial from a displayed line item in the Callers List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The following is an example of a Callers List in a spreadsheet application. D ra f t1 The file displays the name, phone number, and the line that the call came in on. 5-290 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling Callers List You can enable and disable user access to the Callers List on the IP phones using the following parameter in the configuration files: • callers list disabled Valid values for this parameter are 0 (enabled) and 1 (disabled). If this parameter is set to 0, the Callers List can be accessed by all users. If this parameter is set to 1, the IP phone does not save any caller information to the Caller List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 3 To delete all entries in the Callers list, press the 3 Delete key at the "Callers List" header. To delete a line item from the Callers List, select the line item you want to delete and press the 3 Delete key. 4 To cancel a delete function, press the r or the s Scroll keys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Downloading the Callers List Use the following procedure to download the Callers List using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Directory. 2 In the Callers List field, click on ra f t1 1 . A “File Download” message displays. Click . 4 Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Callers List and click . D 3 The callerslist.csv file downloads to your computer.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizable Callers List and Services Keys The IP phones currently have a Callers List key (all 5i Series phones) and a Services key (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Missed Calls Indicator The IP phone has a "missed calls" indicator that increments the number of missed calls to the phone. This feature is accessible from the IP phone UI only. You can enable and disable the Missed Calls Indicator feature using the configuration files. When disabled, the Missed Calls Indicator does not increment as calls come into the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Accessing and Clearing Missed Calls Use the following procedure to access and clear missed calls from the Callers List. Once you display the Callers List, the " New Calls" indicator clears. IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press the “Callers List” key on the phone to enter the Callers List. 2 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Callers List to find the line items that have the b icon with the receiver ON.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directory List The IP phones have a "Directory List" feature that allows you to store frequently used names and numbers on the phone. You can also dial directly from the directory entry. The following illustrations show the default location of the Directory Key on each type of phone model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Directory Key Options Key (Directory is an option under Services Menu) 6753i t1 6751i D ra f Directory Key 5-298 6755i 6757i/6757i CT 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Directory List Capabilities In the Directory List a user or administrator can store a maximum of 7 numbers associated with a unique name. You can apply pre-defined labels to the entry which include, Office, Home, Cell, and Pager, or create your own labels. Labels can be up to 14 characters in length.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • You can use any spreadsheet application to open the file for viewing. The following is an example of a Directory List in a spreadsheet application. This is an administrator and user function. t1 The file displays the name, phone number(s), and line number(s) for each Directory entry.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Server to IP Phone Download You can populate your IP phone Directory List with server directory files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Server to IP Phone Download Behavior The software that reads directory files from the server, loads the file’s contents into the phone's NVRAM when the phone is booting. Directory entries in the NVRAM that originate from a server directory file are 'owned' by the server. During the boot process both directory files are read, combined into a single list, and any duplicate entries are deleted from the list.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the Directory List Use the following procedures to access and use the Directory List. Note: In the following procedure, the location of keys (hard keys, softkeys, and programmable keys) on the phone are dependant on your specific phone model. See Chapter 1, Overview, for the keys that are specific to your phone model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action To edit an entry in the Directory List: 5 a At a line item in the Directory List, press the 3 key. Note: Use the SAVE key to scroll between the number, name and line entries. Edit the phone number if required and press SAVE. c Edit the name if required and press SAVE. d Edit the line if required and press SAVE. e Press SAVE to save the changes and exit the editing function.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action 9 To exit the Directory List, press the DIRECTORY key again, the GOODBYE key, or the QUIT key (depending on your specific phone model). From the 9480i CT and 6757i CT handset: 10 a Press the Public/Private softkeys to toggle between making the new entry public or private. Note: The entry is set to Private by default. If the entry is made Public, the entry is sent to the handsets.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Downloading from the Server to the IP Phone You can use the configuration files to download the Directory List from the configuration server to the IP phone.. Note: You must use TFTP to download the Directory List. Use the following procedure to configure the download. Configuration Files t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for downloading the Directory List, see Appendix A, the section, “Directory Settings” on page A-123.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Use the following procedure to configure the download. Click on Operation->Directory. 2 In the Directory List field, click on . ra f 1 t1 Aastra Web UI A “File Download” message displays. Click . 4 Enter the location on your computer where you want to download the Directory List and click . D 3 The directorylist.csv file downloads to your computer. 5 Use a spreadsheet application to open and view the Directory List.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) The Voicemail feature on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones allow you to configure lines with phone numbers so the phone can dial out to connect to a voicemail server. You associate the Voicemail numbers with the phone numbers configured on each line (1 - 9 lines). For each assigned Voicemail number, there can be a minimum of 0 or a maximum of 1 Voicemail access phone number.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features To configure the Voicemail feature on the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT, you must enter the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip lineN vmail: You can enter up to 9 Voicemail numbers associated with each of the 9 lines on the phone.
Using Voicemail (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i6757i CT only) Use the following procedure to access and use voicemail. IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT: 1 Press Services on the phone to display the Services menu. 2 From the Services menu, select "Voicemail". 3 Use the r and s to scroll through the line items in the Voicemail List.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Customized Services Extensible Markup Language (XML) is a markup language much like HTML. HTML was designed to display data and to focus on how data looks. XML was designed to describe data and to focus on what data is. The following are characteristics of XML: • XML tags are not predefined. You must define your own tags. • XML uses a Document Type Definition (DTD) or an XML Schema to describe the data.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Description AastraIPPhoneDirectory (for Directory List screen) Creates an online Directory List that a user can browse in real-time. AastraIPPhoneStatus (for Idle screen) Creates a screen that displays status messages when applicable. AastraIPPhoneExecute (for executing XML commands) Allows the phone to execute commands (i.e., “reset”, “NoOp”, etc.) using XML.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features You can also use the following attributes/options with the XML objects to further customize your XML applications: Attribute/Option Description/Usage Valid Values Beep Enables or disables a BEEP option to indicate a status on the phone. yes | no Default = no Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) Configuration files (See page 5-315) Aastra Web UI (See page 5-315) Note: This value is case sensitive.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Attribute/Option Description/Usage Valid Values LockIn Specifies whether or not the information on the LCD screen stays displayed when other events occur (such as pressing buttons on the keypad). yes | no Default = no Use with: XML object (See Appendix F) CancelAction Specifies a URI that the phone executes a GET on when the user presses the default CANCEL key. For example: cancelAction= http:// 10.50.10.117/ ft.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling a Beep for Status Message Displays You can enable or disable a BEEP option using the Status Message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI. Note: For enabling/disabling a status message beep using the Status Message object, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications.” When the phone receives a status message, the BEEP notifies the user that the message is displaying.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Scroll Delay Option for Status Messages The IP phones support a scroll delay option that allows you to set the time delay, in seconds, between the scrolling of each status message on the phone. The default time is 5 seconds for each message to display before scrolling to the next message. You can configure this option via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features For more information about creating XML configuration scripts and for XML script examples, see Appendix F, “Creating and Managing XML Applications”. Configuring the Phone to use XML You can configure the phone to request the XML objects you create by configuring specific parameters via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Users can access XML applications via softkeys configured on the IP phones.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Push Requests In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from a softkey, an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. When the phone sees a PUSH request containing an XML object, it tries to authenticate the request.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Select a key from keys 1 through 20. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey. For example, "XML". 5 In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 7 In the "XML Application Title" field, enter the name of the XML application that you want to display on the IP phone Services Menu. In the illustration above, the XML Application Title is "Aastra Telecom". 8 Click to save your changes. The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately. When the XML application is pushed to the phone via an HTTP POST, a host IP address or domain name server is required.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9143i, 6753i 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen For the 6753i and 9143i, select a key from keys 3 through 6. 3 In the "Hard Key" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Value" field, enter the IP address or qualified domain name of the XML application. 5 Click D 2 to save your changes. The XML application is applied to the IP phone immediately.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server. 7 In the "XML Push Server List (Approved IP Addresses)" field, enter the host IP address and/or domain name server. You can enter multiple IP address and/or domain name servers (separated by commas). In the example in Step 6, the illustration shows a host IP address of "10.50.10.53, 10.50.10.54" in the applicable field. 8 Click D ra f t1 6 to save your changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Using the XML Customized Service After you create, save, and configure the IP phone with an XML application, the customized service is ready for you to use. Use the following procedure to use the XML feature on the IP phone. IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press the Services key on the phone to display the Services menu. 2 Select "Custom Features".
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features IP Phone UI Step Action For the 9143i, 6753i: 1 Press the programmable key configured on the phone for XML services. A "Custom Features" screen displays. 2 Use the r and s to scroll through the customized features. 3 Select a service to display the information for that customized service. To exit from the "Custom Features" screen, press the XML programmable key again.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Action URIs The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain events occur. The IP phone events that support this feature are: The IP phones have a feature that allows an administrator to specify a uniform resource identifier (URI) that triggers a GET when certain XML events occur.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Action URI Description XML SIP Notify Specifies the URI to be called when an empty XML SIP NOTIFY is received by the phone. For more information, see “XML SIP Notify Events” on page 5-339. Poll Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds. For more information, see “Polling Action URIs” on page 5-334. Poll Interval Specifies the interval, in seconds, between calls from the phone to the "action uri poll".
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuration File Parameters Aastra Web UI Parameters at Advanced Settings->Action URI Applicable Variables Registration Event $$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$ $$REGISTRATIONCODE$$ action uri incoming Incoming Call $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$DISPLAYNAME$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$INCOMINGNAME$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$CALLDURATION$$ $$CALLDIRECTION$$ $$LOCALIP$$ action uri outgoing Outgoing Call $$REMOTENUMBER$$ $$SIPUSERNAME$$ $$LINESTATE$$ $$LOCALIP$$ action uri offhook O
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features The following table provides a description of each variable.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Variable Description $$CALLDIRECTION$$ Specifies whether the current/last call was incoming or outgoing. This variable is associated with: • onhook Note: This variable allows for enhanced information in call records and billing applications. Specifies the state of the phone’s registration.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Note: If the phone can’t find the Action URI you specify, it returns a “NULL” response. For example, http://10.50.10.140/outgoing.pl?number= You can configure this feature via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring XML Action URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Action URIs using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI. 2 Enter an XML URI for a startup event in the “Startup” field. For example: ra f t1 1 D http://10.50.10.140/startup This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs. 3 Enter an XML URI for a successful registration in the “Successful Registration” field. For example: http://10.50.10.14/registered.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Enter an XML URI in the “Registration Event” field, for when the phone performs registration. For example: http://10.30.100.39/PHPtests/ actionuri.php?action=RegEvt®state=$$REGISTRATIONSTATE$$®code=$$REGI STRATIONCODE$$ This parameter specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event change occurs.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 8 Enter an XML URI for an onhook event in the “Onhook” field. For example: http://10.50.10.140/onhook.php?state=$$LINESTATE$$ This parameter specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an onhook event occurs. Note: For an onhook event, use the associated variables indicated in the table “Action URIs and Associated Variables” on page 5-326.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Polling Action URIs Another way to reach a phone behind a NAT/firewall is to have the phone make an XML call at periodic intervals. An Administrator can use the action uri poll parameter that commands the phone to perform an XML call at configurable intervals. An Administrator can specify the URI to be called and specify the interval between polls using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Polling Action URI via the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure polling Action URI using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI. 2 In the “Poll” field, enter a URI to be called every "action uri pool interval" seconds. Enter the value in a URI format. For example, http://myserver.com/myappli.xml.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Action URI Disconnected The phones have a parameter, “action uri disconnected” that allow a disconnect event to occur when the phone transitions from any active state (outgoing, incoming, connected, or calling) to an idle state. This parameter can use the variable “$$LINESTATE$$”. Note: The $$LINESTATE$$ variable is optional and not required when enabling the “action uri disconnected” parameter.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Example If you enter the following string on Phone A for the “action uri disconnected” parameter: action uri disconnected: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/ disconnected.xml?state=$$LINESTATE$$ and then Phone A calls Phone B, Phone B answers and then hangs up, Phone A executes a GET on: http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.xml?state=CONNECTED which is what the remote server receives.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event. 2 In the “Disconnected” field, enter a valid URI for which the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state. Leaving this field empty disables the Action URI Disconnected feature. For example, ra f t1 1 http://fargo.ana.aastra.com/disconnected.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML SIP Notify Events In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. An Administrator can enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event using a specific parameter in the configuration files (sip xml notify event) or the Aastra Web UI (XML SIP Notify). If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content t1 NOTIFY sip:200@10.30.100.103:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport From: ;tag=81be2861f3 To: Jacky200 Contact:
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY using the Configuration Files To enable/disable the SIP NOTIFY event, you can set the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip xml notify event If the content is missing in the SIP NOTIFY message received by the phone, the phone automatically uses the value you specify for the following parameter: • action uri xml sip notify Configuration Files D ra f t1 For the specific parameter you can set in th
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Enabling/Disabling XML SIP NOTIFY Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable the XML SIP NOTIFY feature in the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Enabling/Disabling the XML SIP NOTIFY Feature Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 1 XML SIP Notify Parameter 5-342 Enabling Whitelist Proxy is recommended 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The “XML SIP Notify" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. This field enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring XML SIP NOTIFY using the Aastra Web UI if an Empty SIP NOTIFY Message Received by the Phone Use the following procedure in the Aastra Web UI to configure the XML SIP NOTIFY parameter when the phone receives an empty SIP NOTIFY message.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Softkey URI In addition to specifying variables for the Action URIs, you can also specify variables in the XML softkey URIs that are bound when the key is pressed. These variables are the same as those used in the Action URIs.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features You can configure the XML softkey URI variables via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuring XML Softkey URIs Use the following procedures to configure XML Softkey URIs using the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters” on page A-192.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Click on Operation->Softkeys and XML. 2 Select a key from keys 1 through 20. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 In the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example, "aastra". D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For example: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ Click to save your changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Aastra Web UI For the 9143i, 6753i: 1 Click on Operation->Programmable Keys. ra f t1 6753i and 9143i Screen On the 9143i and 6753i, select a key from keys 1 through 6. 3 In the "Type" field, select XML from the list box. 4 On the 9143i and 6753i, in the "Label" field, enter a label that displays on the IP phone for the XML softkey. For example, "aastra". D 2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 5 In the "Value" field, enter the URI that the phone performs a GET on when the key is pressed. For example: http://10.50.10.140/script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ Click to save your changes.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Web Applications Keys The IP Phones have a feature that allow a User or Administrator to assign a pre-programmed XML-based application to a softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key. This pre-programmed key is called, "WebApps", and is hardcoded on the phone. Pressing this key launches an XML-based application called, “xml.myaastra.com”. You can assign the WebApps key to any softkey, programmable key, or expansion module key on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Key Redirection The IP phones allow the redirecting of phone-based hard keys to XML scripts. This allows the server to provide the phone with Redial, Transfer (Xfer), Conference (Conf), and Intercom (Icom) key features, and the Voicemail option feature, rather then accessing them from the phone-side. This feature allows you to access the redirected keys and voicemail option from the server using the IP Phone’s Services Menu.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring XML Redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom Keys, and the Voicemail Option Use the following procedure to configure XML redirection of the Redial, Xfer, Conf, and Icom keys, and the Voicemail option. Configuration Files For the specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail)” on page A-237.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features • On the 6751i, the redirection feature works after selecting “Options” from the Services Menu. To display the original Options Menu, press and hold the Services key. An Administrator can configure the XML Options Key (or Services Key on the 6751i), redirection URI parameter using the configuration files only.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features XML Applications and Off-Hook Interaction A feature on the IP phone allows you to specify whether the phone is prevented from going into the off-hook/dialing state when the handset is off-hook and the call ends. By default, the phone behaves as follows: You are in a call using the handset and the phone displays an XML application. The far-end terminates the call, and a new XML application gets pushed/pulled onto the display.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features XML Override for a Locked Phone The IP phones have a feature that allows a locked phone to be overridden when an XML application is sent to the phone. This feature also allows you to still use any softkeys/programmable key/Extension Module Keys applicable to the XML application even though the phone is locked. However, any keys NOT associated with the XML application cannot be used when the phone is locked.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustments The audio gain properties for the IP phone handset, headset, and speakerphone is adjusted to reduce side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Parameter Description Handsfree tx gain The increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. Audio mode Allows you to configure how the d/f key (handsfree key) works. Audio mode has 4 options: 0 (Speaker) - Calls can be made or received using the handset or handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by pressing the d /fkey.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Centralized Conferencing (for Sylantro and Broadsoft Servers) The IP phones include support for centralized conferencing (Ad-Hoc conferencing) for Sylantro and Broadsoft servers. This feature provides centralized conferencing on the SIP server (versus localized, on the phone) and allows IP phone users to do these tasks: • Conference two active calls together into a conference call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features To use the centralized conferencing after it is enabled, see your Model-specific IP Phone User Guide.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Configuring Centralized Conferencing Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure centralized conferencing using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings->Basic SIP Network Settings. 2 In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions: D ra f t1 1 • To disable centralized conferencing on the IP phone, leave this field empty (blank).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Aastra Web UI 3 Click to save your changes. Per-Line Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Line <#>->Basic SIP Network Settings 2 In the “Conference Server URI” field, do one of the following actions: ra f t1 1 To disable centralized conferencing on this line, leave this field empty (blank).
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features “SIP Join” Feature for 3-Way Conference (not applicable to the 6751i) The IP Phones support RFC 3911 which allows an additional caller to join an active call between two parties if the caller knows the dialog information. This feature begins a conference using a join header as described in RFC 3911. The “SIP Join“ feature provides the following: • Security via the whitelist (which is a feature that already exists on the phone).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring the “SIP Join” Feature Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure the “SIP Join feature in the configuration files: sip join support Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference” on page A-90. 5-364 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features Authentication Support for HTTP/HTTPS Download Methods, used with Broadsoft Client Management System (CMS) The IP phones support HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication as defined in RFC 2617. (The HTTP client supports digest authentication; the HTTP server does not; the HTTP server supports basic authentication). This feature allows the phones to interoperate with Broadsoft’s CMS phone configuration tool.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Configuring Broadsoft CMS Support via the Configuration Files Configure Broadsoft CMS support on the IP Phone using the following parameters in the configuration files: • http digest force login • http digest username • http digest password Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS” on page A-91.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features 4. Press the “Log In" key to displays the username/password screen. Note: On the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT, you use the Log In softkey to log in. On the 9143i, 6751i, and 6753i, you press the right arrow key to log in.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Customizing the Display Columns on the M675i Expansion Module The M675i Expansion Module screen displays softkeys in column format. The function keys on the bottom left of the Module allow you to display 3 full screens of softkeys.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features List 3 List 5 List 4 Page 2 Screen List 6 Page 3 Screen t1 To use the M675i, press the function key for the page you want to display to the LCD (page 1, page2, or page 3), and press the applicable softkey. ra f You can customize the headings on each M675i Expansion Module screen using the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features Expansion Module 3 (3 pages) • expmod3page1left • expmod3page1right • expmod3page2left • expmod3page2right • expmod3page3left • expmod3page3right Example The following is an example of configuring Expansion Module 1 column headings.
Configuring Operational Features Operational Features These settings display to the Expansion Module as shown in the following illustrations. Personnel Ext Marketing Ext Operations Ext Page 1 Screen Logistics Ext t1 Page 2 Screen D ra f Engineering Ext Shipping Ext Page 3 Screen Customizing the M675i Expansion Module Column Display.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational Features 5-372 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Chapter 6 Configuring Advanced Operational Features About this chapter t1 Introduction ra f The IP phones have advanced operational features you can configure using the configuration files and/or the Aastra Web UI. This chapter describes each of these features and provides procedures for configuring each feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 6-22 Whitelist Proxy page 6-24 Transport Layer Security (TLS) page 6-26 802.1x Support page 6-31 Symmetric UDP Signaling page 6-43 Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers page 6-44 GRUU and sip.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Description This section provides the following information about advanced features of the IP phones: Description MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages Allows you to enable or disable the sending of the MAC address and line number from the IP phone to the call server, in a REGISTER message.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Feature Description Transport Layer Security (TLS) Allows you to enable or disable the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS). Persistent TLS sets up the connection to the server once and re-uses that connection for all calls from the phone. The setup connection for Persistent TLS is established during the registration of the phone.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features MAC Address/Line Number in REGISTER Messages The IP phones can send the MAC address and line number in the REGISTER packets making it easier for the call server when a user configures the phones via the Aastra Web UI or the IP Phone UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features . Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Setting. 2 Enable the "Send MAC Address in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Enable the "Send Line Number in REGISTER Message" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 4 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features SIP Message Sequence for Blind Transfer The SIP message sequence for Blind Transfer avoids the transfer target having two simultaneous calls. Prior to release 1.4, a CANCEL message was sent to the transfer target (if it was in a ringing state) after sending a REFER to the transferee to complete the transfer. In the 1.4 and later releases, the CANCEL is now sent before the REFER message.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Update Caller ID During a Call It is possible for a proxy or call server to update the Caller ID information that displays on the phone during a call, by modifying the SIP Contact header in the re-INVITE message. The phone displays the updated name and number information contained within the Contact header.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Boot Sequence Recovery Mode You can force the IP phone into recovery mode by pressing the 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays. This feature is enabled by default on the IP phone. You can disable this feature using the following parameter in the configuration files: • force web recovery mode disabled Valid values for this parameter are 0 (false) and 1 (true). Default is 0 (false).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Auto-discovery Using mDNS The IP phones can perform an auto-discovery of all servers on a network using mDNS. When the IP phone discovers a TFTP server, it is automatically configured by that TFTP server. An unconfigured phone (phone right out of the box) added to a network, attempts to auto-discover a configuration server on the network without any end-user intervention.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Single Call Restriction (6757i CT and 9480i CT only) On the 6757i CT and 9480i CT, an administrator can enable or disable a single call restriction between the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and a call server. When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings. 2 Enable the "Two Call Support" field by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box). 3 Click D ra f t1 Step to save your settings. Note: The session prompts you to restart the IP phone to apply the configuration settings. 4 6-12 Select Operation->Reset and click . 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Missed Call Summary Subscription The “Missed Call Summary Subscription” feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. This feature is called the Missed Call Summary Subscription and can be set with a timer that allows the phone to use the feature for a period of time before the timer expires.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the Configuration Files In addition to enabling/disabling the Misses Call Summary Subscription, You can also configure the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses this feature. The timer is configurable on a global basis only.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring Missed Call Summary Subscription using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Global Configuration Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 2 The "Missed Call Summary Subscription" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. This feature allows missed calls that have been redirected by the server, to be incremented in the missed calls indicator on the phone it was initially directed to. For example, phones A, B, and C are connected to the server.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features As-Feature-Event Subscription The IP phones support server-side Do Not Disturb (DND), Call Forward (CFWD), and Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) feature events.This feature is called “as-feature-event” and works with the DND, CFWD, and ACD keys. Notes: 1. The 6751i supports server-side DND and CFWD only. 2. The DND, CFWD, and ACD server-side feature is not applicable to the CT handset.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features When you press the DND, CFWD, or ACD key, only one attempt is made to enable/disable the “as-feature-event” feature on the server. The message “Trying” displays on the phone’s LCD after pressing the key. If the attempt is successful, the idle screen displays. If the attempt is unsuccessful, the message “Failed” displays. The user can press the softkey again to re-attempt the feature if required.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Note: IMPORTANT! If DND and CFWD are configured to use “Account” mode on the IP Phone, pressing the DND and CFWD keys apply to the account in focus as described in Chapter 3, the section, “Account Configuration” on page 3-35. If ACD is configured on the phone, the ACD softkey applies to the line for which the key is configured. The ACD softkey must be configured for the first line of an account.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring As-Feature-Event Subscription Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable/disable the server-side “as-feature-event” on the IP Phone using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->LineN->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, enable the "As--Feature-Event Subscription" field, by checking the check box. (Disable this field by unchecking the box).
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. D ra f t1 As-Feature-Event Subscription Period 5 In the “Advanced SIP Settings” section, in the “As-Feature-Event Subscription Period” field, enter the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone waits after sending a SUBSCRIBE, to receive a NOTIFY response from the server side. Default is 3600. Valid values are 6 Click to save your changes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Blacklist Duration The Blacklist Duration feature helps to reduce unnecessary delays during proxy/ registrar server failures, caused by the IP phone repeatedly sending SIP messages to a failed server. If you enable this feature, then whenever the IP phone sends a SIP message to a server, and does not get a response, the phone automatically adds the server to the blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending messages to any servers on the blacklist.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring a Server Blacklist Using the Aastra Web UI You use the following procedure to configure Blacklist Duration using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings 2 In the “Blacklist Duration” field, specify the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Whitelist Proxy To protect your IP phone network, you can configure a “Whitelist Proxy” feature that screens incoming call requests received by the IP phones. When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring Whitelist Proxy Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to configure the Whitelist Proxy feature using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings 2 The "Whitelist Proxy" field is disabled by default. To enable this field, check the box. D ra f t1 1 When this feature is enabled, an IP phone accepts call requests from a trusted proxy server only.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Transport Layer Security (TLS) The IP Phones support a transport protocol called Transport Layer Security (TLS) and Persistent TLS. TLS is a protocol that ensures communication privacy between the SIP phones and the Internet. TLS ensures that no third party may eavesdrop or tamper with any message. TLS is composed of two layers: the TLS Record Protocol and the TLS handshake protocol.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Notes: 1. Persistent TLS requires the outbound proxy server and outbound proxy port parameters be configured in either the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI (Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Basic SIP Network Settings). There can be only one persistent TLS connection created per phone. The phone establishes the TLS connection to the configured outbound proxy. 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features When an IP phone receives an incoming call, the IP phone does the following actions: • Checks to see if the incoming call is from a registered proxy server. • If the call is forwarded via a registered proxy server, then the message has already been verified and authenticated by the server. The caller is part of the Trust Network. The IP phone UI displays the caller information contained in the PAI header.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring TLS Using the Aastra Web UI To configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI, you must enable TLS or Persistent TLS first. Then you must define the TLS certificate file names that you want the phone to use. Use the following procedure to configure TLS using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Global SIP->Advanced SIP Settings. 2 In the "Transport Protocol" field, select TLS or Persistent TLS.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->TLS Support. 5 Enter the certificate file names and the private key file name in the appropriate fields. ra f t1 4 The Root and Intermediate Certificate files contain one root certificate and zero or more intermediate certificates which must be placed in order of certificate signing with root certificate being the first in the file.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features 802.1x Support The IP phones support the IEEE 802.1x protocol. The 802.1x protocol is a standard for passing Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) over a wired or wireless Local Area Network (LAN). The 802.1x protocol on the IP phone facilitates media-level access control, and offers the capability to permit or deny network connectivity, control LAN access, and apply traffic policy, based on user or endpoint identity.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features • If the certificates and private key ARE stored in the phone, the phone uses them during the authentication process. • If the phone uses EAP-TLS for successful authentication, after the phone reboots, it downloads the latest certificates and private key files to the phone. • The private key uses AES-128 to encrypt the private key file.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Configuration Files You use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files. For EAP-MD5 use: eap type • identity • md5 password • pc port passthrough enabled For EAP-TLS use: t1 • eap type • identity • 802.1x root and intermediate certificates (use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates) • 802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the IP Phone UI. Note: If configuring 802.1x using the IP Phone UI, the certificates and private keys must already be configured and stored on the phone. Use the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI to load certificates and private keys.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 3 On 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT: Select Network Settings->Ethernet->Enable PassThru Port. On the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Select Network Settings->Ethernet->PC Port Enabled. 1. LAN Port Link 10. Ethernet Ethernet Link 9143i, 6751i, 6753i ra f - Select Enter t1 Next 1. LAN Port Link 2. PC Port Link 3. Enable PassThru Port 4. 802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 4 The PC PassThru Port is enabled by default. Enable PassThru Port Enable PassThru Port Yes - Change t1 Cancel Done - ra f Note: The PC PassThru Port must be enabled to use the 802.1x Protocol. Press Done (on 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT). or Press Next (on 9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 6 Select 802.1x Settings. 7 Select 802.1x Mode. D 5 802.1x Settings 1. 802.1x Mode 1. 802.1x Mode 2.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 8 Select EAP-MD5 to configure the phone to use MD5 authentication; or Select EAP-TLS to configure the phone to use TLS authentication. 4. 802.1x Settings 802.1x Mode Next 1. 802.1x Mode Enter Next Enter Disabled EAP-MD5 802.1x Mode Disabled Next Set 802.1x Mode EAP-MD5 Next Set 802.1x Mode EAP-TLS Next Set t1 EAP-TLS ra f Cancel Done - Note: The 802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 12 Enter the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. 1. EAP-MD5 Settings Next Username Enter Username: | 1. Identity Next Enter User Name | Cancel Set Enter Password | Cancel Set 2. MD5 Password Next t1 - Backspace Nextspace Cancel - ABC Done - Use the keys as applicable while entering the username; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT).
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra IP Phone UI Step Action 15 Use the keys as applicable while entering the password; then press Done (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT). or Press Set (9143i, 6751i, 6753i). 16 Press the key to save your settings and exit from the IP Phone UI. Configuring the 802.1x Protocol Using the Aastra Web UI t1 Use the following procedure to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 4 In the “MD5 Password” field, enter a password used for the MD5 authentication of the phone. For example, password1. 5 Click 6 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable D ra f t1 to save your changes. 7 The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI To configure EAP-TLS: Click on Advanced Settings->802.1x Support. 1 In the “EAP Type” field, select EAP-TLS. Valid values are: Disabled (Default), EAP-MD5, and EAP-TLS. 2 In the “Identity” field, enter an Identity for the IP phone for which you are configuring 802.1x. For example, phone1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Aastra Web UI 6 In the “Trusted Certificates Filename” field, enter the filename that contains the trusted certificates. For example: trusted_certificates.pem. 7 Click 8 Click on Advanced Settings->Network->Basic Network Settings. PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable D ra f t1 to save your changes. 9 The “PC Port PassThru Enable/Disable” field is enabled by default. To disable this field, uncheck the box.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Symmetric UDP Signaling By default, the IP phones use symmetric UDP signaling for outgoing UDP SIP messages. When symmetric UDP is enabled, the IP phone generates and listens for UDP messages using port 5060. You can manually disable symmetric UDP signaling using the IP phone’s configuration file. When you disable symmetric UDP signaling, then the IP phone chooses a random source port for UDP messages.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Removing UserAgent and Server SIP Headers Currently, the phone always configures the SIP UserAgent/Server headers to contain: Aastra / You can suppress the addition of these headers by using the following parameter in the configuration files: • sip user-agent Setting this parameter allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and Server SIP headers from the SIP stack.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features GRUU and sip.instance Support Globally Routable User-Agent URIs (GRUUs) provide a way for anyone on the Internet to route a call to a specific instance of a User-Agent. The IP phones provide GRUU support using draft-ietf-sip-gruu-15. A sip.instance is added to all non-GRUU contacts. By default, this feature is enabled. You can enable or disable this support using the configuration files.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Multi-Stage Digit Collection (Billing Codes) Support (for Sylantro Servers) The IP Phones support Multi-Stage Digit Collection (billing codes) for Sylantro Servers. Sylantro Server features, like mandatory and optional billing codes, requires that the application server notify the phone to collect more digits before completing the call. The IP phone is able to collect digits in two stages to support the billing code feature.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features For example, suppose the IP phone user is using billing code 300, and dialing the external number 617-238-5500.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Numbers Not Requiring Billing Codes Billing codes are not required for the following two types of calls: Emergency calls (E911) • Calls between extensions D ra f t1 • 6-48 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Configurable DNS Queries The domain name system (DNS) is the way that Internet domain names are located and translated into Internet Protocol addresses. A domain name is a meaningful and easy-to-remember identifier for an Internet address. The lists of domain names and IP addresses are distributed throughout the Internet in a hierarchy of authority within a database of records.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features Note: On the phone side, if you configure the phone with a FullyQualified Domain Name (FQDN) proxy and specified port, the phone always sends “A only” lookups to find the Host IP Address of the proxy.
Configuring Advanced Operational Features Advanced Operational Features Ignore Out of Sequence Errors An Administrator can configure the phone via the “sip accept out of order requests” parameter to ignore CSeq number errors on all SIP dialogs on the phone. When this parameter is enabled, the phone no longer verifies that the sequence numbers increase for each message within a dialog, and does not report a "CSeq Out of Order" error if they do not increase.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Features “Early-Only” Parameter in Replaces Header RFC3891 The phones support the “early-only” parameter in the “Replaces” header according to RFC3891. When the phone receives a Replaces header with the early-only parameter, it replaces the existing dialog if the call is still in the early state. If the call has been answered, then the Replaces request is rejected. Note: This feature is not supported in outgoing requests.
Chapter 7 Encrypted Files on the IP Phone About this chapter Introduction t1 This chapter provides information about encryption on the IP phones and provides methods an administrator can use to store encrypted files to a server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone An encryption feature for the IP phone allows Service Providers the capability of storing encrypted files on their server to protect against unauthorized access and tampering of sensitive information (i.e., user accounts, login passwords, registration information). Service Providers also have the capability of locking a phone to use a specific server-provided configuration only.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone To make changes to the configuration files, the System Administrator must save the original files. Note: If the use of encrypted configuration files is enabled (via security.tuz or pre-provisioned on the IP phone) the aastra.cfg and .cfg files are ignored, and only the encrypted equivalent files aastra.tuz and .tuz are read.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Procedure to Encrypt Configuration Files To encrypt the IP phone configuration files: 1. Open a command line window application (i.e., DOS window). 2. At the prompt, enter anacrypt.exe and press . C:\> anacrypt.exe -h Provides encryption of the configuration files used for the family of Aastra IP phones, using 56bit triple-DES and site-specific keys. Copyright (c) 2008, Aastra Technologies, Ltd. t1 Copyright (c) 1999, Philip J.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Examples The following examples illustrate the use of the anacrypt.exe file. Example 1 Generating a security.tuz file with password 1234abcd For firmware version 2.2.0 and up: C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd For any firmware version: Example 2 t1 C:\>anacrypt -i -p 1234abcd -v1 ra f Encrypting a single aastra.cfg file with password 1234abcd C:\>anacrypt aastra.cfg -p 1234abcd D Example 3 Encrypting a .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Example 5 Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the new MAC encryption and generating a security.tuz file at the same time.(2.2.0 and up) C:\>anacrypt -d C:\data -p 1234abcd -m -i Example 6 Encrypting all cfg files in C:\data with password 1234abcd using the and generating a security.tuz file at the same time for all firmware versions.
Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Encrypted Files on the IP Phone Configuring Vendor Configuration File Encryption Use the following procedure to configure vendor configuration file encryption on the IP Phones. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Encryption Setting” on page A-243. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Encrypted Files on the IP Phone 7-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Upgrading the Firmware About this chapter Chapter 8 Upgrading the Firmware About this chapter t1 Introduction This chapter provides information about upgrading the IP phone firmware. ra f Topics This chapter covers the following topics: D Topic Upgrading the Firmware Page page 8-2 Using the “Firmware Update” Page in the Aastra Web UI page 8-2 Using the Restart Feature page 8-5 Using the Auto-Resync Feature page 8-7 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware The IP phones support the protocols, TFTP, FTP, HTTP or HTTPS to download configuration files and upgrade firmware to the phones from a configuration server. The configuration server should be ready and able to accept connections. For information on configuration server requirements, see Chapter 1, the section, “Configuration Server Requirement” on page 1-35.
Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Use the following procedure to manually update the firmware on your phone from the specified configuration server. Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Firmware Update. D ra f t1 Step 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 In the “File Name” field, enter the firmware file name (.st) that you want to download to your IP phone. For example, 53i.st (for a 6753i phone). Note: This file name must match the actual name of the firmware file residing on your configuration server. IMPORTANT: The renamed 675xi phones still use the old naming convention for the .st files. See the following table. Associated Firmware 9143i 9143i.
Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 8 (FTP only) In the “Password ” field, enter the password that is used for authentication when the FTP server is accessed. 9 Click . This starts the upgrade process. If the upgrade is successful the following message displays on the screen: "Firmware Upgrade Successful". Using the Restart Feature t1 Restarting the phone forces the phone to check for both firmware and configuration files stored on the configuration server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Restarting the Phone Using the Aastra Web UI Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click ra f t1 1 D to restart the phone. 8-6 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Using the Auto-Resync Feature The auto-resync feature on the IP phones allows an administrator to enable the phone to be updated automatically once a day at a specific time in a 24-hour period if the files on the server have changed. This feature works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP, and HTTPS servers. An administrator can enable this feature using the Aastra Web UI or using the configuration files (aastra.cfg and .cfg).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Configuration Files Use the following procedure to configure automatic updates of the IP phone firmware, configuration files, or both. Configuration Files For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files for automatic update, see Appendix A, the section, “Configuration Server Settings” on page A-18. . t1 Notes: 1. If a user is accessing the Aastra Web UI, they are not informed of an auto-reboot. ra f 2.
Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Enabling Auto-Resync Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to enable auto-resync for the phones in your network. Aastra Web UI Step Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Configuration Server->Auto-Resync. D ra f t1 Auto-Sync Parameters 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 2 In the “Mode” field, select the auto-resync mode you want to use to automatically update the phone. Valid values are: In the “Time (24-hour)” field, select the time that you want the update to take place. Valid values are 00:00 to 23:30 (in 30 minute increments).
Upgrading the Firmware Upgrading the Firmware Aastra Web UI Step Action 7 Click on Operation->Reset. 8 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone and apply the update. D ra f t1 The update performs automatically at the time you designated. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-12 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Upgrading the Firmware D ra f t1 Upgrading the Firmware 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
t1 ra f D
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Upgrading the Firmware 8-16 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting About this chapter Chapter 9 Troubleshooting About this chapter t1 Introduction Topics ra f This chapter describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes. It also includes answers to questions you may have while using the IP phones.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this chapter Topic Page page 9-22 How do I set the IP phone to factory default? page 9-23 How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? page 9-24 How to reset a user’s password? page 9-25 How do I lock and unlock the phone? page 9-27 D ra f t1 How do I restart the IP phone? 9-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Troubleshooting This section describes tasks that a system administrator can perform on the IP phones for troubleshooting purposes.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting In the Aastra Web UI, you use the following parameters to configure log settings: • Log IP - The IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. • Log Port - The IP port to use to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. Reference For more information about the log setting configuration parameters, see Appendix A, the section, “Troubleshooting Parameters” on page A-244.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Parameters Configuration File Parameters KBD (Keyboard module) log module kbd NET (Network module) log module net PROVIS (Provisioning module) log module provis RTPT (Realtime Transport module) log module rtpt SND (Sound module) log module snd PROF (Profiler module) log module prof XML (Extension Markup Lanaguage) log module xml STUN (Simple Traversal of User Datagram Protocol (UDP) through Network Address Translation (NAT) log module stun t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Example 1 To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level. For example, Fatal Errors + Errors + Warnings = 1 + 2 + 4 = 7 log module linemgr: 7 log module user interface: 7 log module sip: 7 In the above example, fatal errors, general errors, and warnings are logged for the line manager, user interface, and SIP call control modules.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Support Information You can save the local and/or server configuration files of the IP phone to the location specified in the "Log Settings" section. Performing this task allows Aastra Technical Support to view the current configuration of the IP phone and troubleshoot as necessary. In the “Support Information” section, you can: • Get local.cfg • Get server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Performing Troubleshooting Tasks Use the following procedures to perform troubleshooting on the IP phone via the configuration files or the Aastra Web UI. Configuration Files D ra f t1 For specific parameters you can set in the configuration files, see Appendix A, the section, “Log Settings” on page A-244. 9-8 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Action 1 Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. D ra f t1 Step To set log settings: 2 In the "Log IP" field, enter the IP address of where you want log files to be stored. 3 In the "Log Port" field, enter the port number associated with the IP address specified in the "Log IP" field. This port passes the information from the IP phone to the IP address location. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Step Action 4 Click 5 Click on Operation->Reset. 6 In the "Restart Phone" field click to save your settings. to restart the IP phone. To set blog modules: 7 Select a module for which you want to have log files created, and sent to a blog. 8 Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI Step Action 10 Click on Operation->Reset. 11 In the "Restart Phone" field click to restart the IP phone. To perform support tasks: 12 To store the local configuration file to the specified location, click on local.cfg" field. in the "Get 13 To store the server configuration file to the specified location, click on "Get server.cfg" field.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting WatchDog Task Feature The IP Phones include a troubleshooting feature called the “WatchDog” task that monitors the status of the phones and provides the ability to get stack traces from the last time the phone failed. When the phone detects a failure (i.e., a crash), it automatically reboots. You can view a WatchDog crash file using the Aastra Web UI at the path, Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Use the following procedure to enable/disable the WatchDog task for the IP Phones using the Aastra Web UI. You can also view the “Crash Log” generated by the WatchDog task using the Aastra Web UI. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting. D ra f t1 1 Enable/Disable WatchDog View Crash Log Enable/Disable WatchDog Task 2 The “WatchDog” field is enabled by default. To disable the WatchDog task, click in the “Enabled” box to clear the check mark.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Aastra Web UI View the Crash Log To view a crash log, in the “Get a Crash Log” field, click the SAVE AS button. You can open the file immediately, or you can save the Crash Log to your PC. D ra f t1 4 9-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Error Messages Display An Administrator can view generated error messages that may have occurred during startup or reboot of the IP Phones. The IP Phone UI has a selection on the Phone Status page called, “Error Messages” at the location, Options->Phone Status->Error Messages. The Aastra Web UI also allows you to view these error messages at the location Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Viewing the Error Messages Using the IP Phone UI Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated during startup. IP Phone UI 1 Press the Options key on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Status. 3 Select Error Messages. Phone Status IP&MAC Addresses LAN Port PC Port Firmware Info Error Messages t1 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting IP Phone UI 4 If error messages display, use the UP and DOWN navigation keys to view the messages. If no error message exist, the message, “No Error Messages” displays on the screen.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Viewing the Error Messages Using the Aastra Web UI Use the following procedure to view the error messages, if any, that generated during startup. Aastra Web UI Click on Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting->Error Messages. D ra f t1 1 Error Messages 2 9-18 Scroll down to the “Error Messages” section to view the error messages that may have generated during startup or reboot of the IP Phone. 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions Troubleshooting Solutions Description This section describes solutions to some most common problems that can occur while using the IP phones. Why does my phone display “Application missing”? t1 If you have experienced networking issues while the phone was downloading the application from the TFTP server, it is possible that the phone can no longer retrieve the required firmware file.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Please ensure that the TFTP server is running and accessible on the network. If the firmware file is correctly located on the running TFTP server, the phone will locate the file and reload the application onto the phone. Why does my phone display the “No Service” message? The phone displays the “No Service” message if the SIP settings have not been set up correctly. The Registrar server could be set to 0.0.0.0. A global value of 0.0.0.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions Reason: Neither of the .tuz and aastra.tuz files are present on the configuration server (TFTP/FTP/HTTP). Fix: Create the encrypted files using anacrypt.exe and copy them to the configuration server. Reason: The encrypted .tuz or aastra.tuz file is encrypted using a different version of anacrypt.exe than the phone firmware. t1 Fix: Run "anacrypt.exe -v" and confirm that the correct version is reported, compared to the phone firmware version.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions How do I restart the IP phone? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Restart Phone. 3 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. Note: To cancel the Restart, press the 3 key. t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: Press Restart. Aastra Web UI ra f Note: To cancel the Restart, press Cancel. Click on Operation->Reset->Phone. 2 Click D 1 9-22 to restart the phone.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How do I set the IP phone to factory default? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Factory Default. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Restore Defaults?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. ra f Aastra Web UI t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i/6757i/6757i CT: The “Reset phone to factory defaults?” prompt displays.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions How do I erase the phone’s local configuration? IP Phone UI Step Action 1 Press 2 Select Administrator Menu and enter your Administrator Password (default is 22222). 3 Select Erase Local Config. 4 For 9143i, 6751i, 6753i: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays. Press # to confirm. on the phone to enter the Options List. ra f Aastra Web UI t1 For 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT: The “Erase local config?” prompt displays.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How to reset a user’s password? IP Phone UI 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select User Password. 3 Enter the current user password. 4 Press Enter. 5 Enter the new user password. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead. Press Enter. 7 Re-enter the new user password. 8 Press Enter.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Aastra Web UI Step Action 4 In the "Confirm Password" field, enter the new user password again. 5 Click D ra f t1 to save your changes. 9-26 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
Troubleshooting Troubleshooting Solutions How do I lock and unlock the phone? IP Phone UI Step Action Lock the phone: 1 Press on the phone to enter the Options List. 2 Select Phone Lock. The prompt, “Lock the phone?” displays. 3 Press Lock to lock the phone. Unlock the phone: Press on the phone to enter the Options List. t1 1 The prompt, “To unlock the phone...Password:” Enter the user or administrator password and press Enter. D The phone unlocks.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Solutions Aastra Web UI Click on Operation->Phone Lock. Lock the phone: 2 ra f t1 1 In the “Lock the Phone?” field, click . Unlock the phone: D The phone locks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is locked”. 3 Click on Operation->Phone Lock. 4 In the “Unlock the Phone?” field, click . The phone unlocks dynamically and displays the following message: “Phone is unlocked”. 9-28 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Releaes 2.
About this appendix Appendix A Configuration Parameters t1 About this appendix Introduction ra f This appendix describes the parameters you can set in the configuration files for the IP phones. The configuration files include and config.cfg.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this appendix Topic Page page A-31 Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting page A-32 Local SIP TLS Port page A-32 HTTPS Client and Server Settings page A-33 HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings page A-35 UPnP Settings page A-37 Virtual Local Area Network (VLAN) Settings page A-38 Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings page A-44 Time and Date Settings page A-45 Time Server Settings page A-52 Custom Time Zone and DST Settings page A-54 t1 Rport Setting B
About this appendix Topic Page page A-126 Call Forward Key Mode Settings page A-127 LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings page A-129 Missed Calls Indicator Settings page A-131 XML Settings page A-132 Action URI Settings page A-135 XML SIP Notify Settings page A-141 Polling Action URI Settings page A-142 Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings page A-143 Ring Tone Per-Line Settings page A-145 Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting page A-146 Switch Focus to Ringing Line t1 Call Forward Setting
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this appendix Topic Page Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters page A-192 Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT page A-193 Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i page A-202 Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT page A-207 Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT page A-214 Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i page A-216 (for
About this appendix Topic Page Troubleshooting Parameters page A-244 page A-244 WatchDog Settings page A-247 D ra f t1 Log Settings 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Setting Parameters in Configuration Files Setting Parameters in Configuration Files You can set specific configuration parameters in the configuration files for configuring you IP phone. The aastra.cfg and .cfg files are stored on the server. The aastra.cfg file stores global IP phone configuration settings. The .cfg file stores configuration settings specific to the IP phone with that MAC address.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters The following sections provide the configuration parameters you can configure on the IP phone. Each parameter table includes the name of the parameter, a description, the format, default value, range, and example. The table also provides the method for which the parameters can be configured (IP phone UI, Aastra Web UI, or configuration files).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Network Settings Parameter – dhcp IP phone UI Aastra Web UI DHCP (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Enables or disables DHCP. Enabling DHCP populates the required network information. The DHCP server serves the network information that the IP phone requires.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – subnet mask IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Subnet Mask (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Subnet mask defines the IP address range local to the IP phone. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66. IP address Default Value 255.255.255.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dns1 IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Primary DNS (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Primary domain name server IP address. For any of the IP address settings on the IP phone a domain name value can be entered instead of an IP address.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ethernet port 0 IP phone UI Aastra Web UI LAN Port (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg The send (TX) and receive (RX) method to use on Ethernet port 0 to transmit and receive data over the LAN.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – pc port passthru enabled IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support. Note: For more information about configuring 802.1x support on the IP phones, see “802.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters DHCP Option Settings Option 12 Parameter– hostname Configuration Files IP Phone UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Hostname Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings Hostname (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Specifies the hostname DHCP Option 12 that the phone sends with the DHCP Request packet. Note: If you change this parameter, you must restart your phone for the change to take affect.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Options 159 and 160 - DHCP Option Override Parameter– dhcp config option override Configuration Files IP Phone UI DHCP Download Options (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description The value specified for this parameter overrides the precedence order for determining a configuration server. aastra.cfg, .
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Password Settings Parameter – admin password Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to set a new administrator password for the IP phone. Note: The IP phones support numeric characters only in passwords. If you enter a password with alpha characters, the phone uses the default password instead.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Emergency Dial Plan Settings Parameter – emergency dial plan Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Operation->Phone Lock Description Allows you to specify an emergency number to use on your IP phone so a caller can contact emergency services in the local area when required. t1 The default emergency numbers on the IP phones is 911, 999, 112, and 110. 911 - A United States emergency number.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – options password enabled Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables password protection of the Options key on the IP phone. If enabled, upon pressing the Options key, a user has to enter a password at the IP phone UI. If the password is entered correctly, the user is allowed to gain access to the Options Menu and no more password prompts display for other password protected screens.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Server Settings Parameter – download protocol Download Protocol (in Web UI) IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, .cfg Protocol to use for downloading new versions of software to the IP phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tftp path Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings-> Configuration Server->Settings IP Phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->TFTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the path name for which the configuration files reside on the TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX. For example, ipphone\6757i\configfiles.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alternate tftp path Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings-> Configuration Server->Settings IP Phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->TFTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies a path name for which the configuration files reside on an alternate TFTP server for downloading to the IP Phone. Note: Enter the path name in the form folderX\folderX\folderX.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ftp server FTP Server (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->FTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, .cfg The FTP server’s IP address or network host name. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign a username and password for access to the FTP server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – ftp username FTP User Name (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->FTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, .cfg The username to enter for accessing the FTP server. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Note: The IP Phones support usernames containing dots (“.”).
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http server HTTP Server (in Web UI) Description IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTP Server Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, .cfg The HTTP server’s IP address. This will become effective after this configuration file has been downloaded into the phone. Optional: You can also assign an HTTP relative path to the HTTP server. See the next parameter (http path).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http port HTTP Port (in Web UI) Description IP Phone UI: Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTP Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Specifies the HTTP port that the server uses to load the configuration to the phone over HTTP. Note: For DHCP to automatically populate this parameter, your DHCP server must support Option 66.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – https path IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Client->Download Path Advanced Settings->Configuration Server aastra.cfg, .cfg HTTPS Path (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description The HTTPS path name to enter.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – auto resync mode Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync aastra.cfg, .cfg Mode (in Web UI) Determines whether the configuration server automatically updates the configuration files only, the firmware only, both the firmware and configuration files, or disables automatic updates. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – auto resync time Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync aastra.cfg, .cfg Time (24-hour) (in Web UI) Description Sets the time of day in a 24-hour period for the IP phone to be automatically updated. This parameter works with TFTP, FTP, HTTP and HTTPS servers. Default Value hh:mm 00h00 (for French and Spanish configuration files) Aastra Web UI 00:00 D Format ra f t1 Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– auto resync max delay Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Advanced Settings->Configuration Server-> Auto-Resync Maximum Delay (in Web UI) Description Specifies the maximum time, in minutes, the phone waits past the scheduled time before starting a checksync.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Network Address Translation (NAT) Settings Parameter – sip nat ip IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, .cfg NAT IP (in Web UI) IP address of the network device that enforces NAT. Format IP Address Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip nat ip: 192.245.2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip nat rtp port IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI NAT RTP Port (in Phone UI and Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> SIP Settings->RTP Port Base Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent. This value must specify the beginning of the RTP port range on the gateway or router.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip nortel nat timer Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Network aastra.cfg, .cfg Nortel NAT Timer (in Web UI) Description The interval, in seconds, that the phone sends SIP ping requests to the Nortel proxy. Format Integer Default Value 30 Range 0 to 2147483647 Example sip nortel nat timer: 60 Description Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Local SIP UDP/TCP Port Setting Parameter – sip local port Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the local source port (UDP/TCP) from which the phone sends SIP messages. Format Numeric Default Value 5060 Range Greater than 1024 and less than 65535 t1 Notes: 1.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTPS Client and Server Settings Parameter – https client method IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI HTTPS Client Method (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS->HTTPS Client Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Defines the security method that the client advertises to the server during the Secure Socket Layer (SSL) handshake. Available options are: TLS 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – https block http post xml IP Phone UI HTTPS Server - Block XML HTTP POSTs (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Enables or disables the blocking of XML scripts from HTTP POSTs. Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->HTTPS-> HTTPS Server->XML Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg t1 Some client applications use HTTP POSTs to transfer XML scripts.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTPS Server Certificate Validation Settings Parameter– https validate certificates Configuration Files IP Phone UI Validate Certificates (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description aastra.cfg, .cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Configuration Server->HTTPS Settings-> Cert Validation Advanced Settings->Network->HTTPS Settings Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of certificates on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files IP Phone UI Check Certificate Hostnames (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Description Enables or disables the HTTPS validation of hostnames on the phone. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example https validate hostnames: 0 Parameter– https user certificates Configuration Files Aastra Web UI ra f Description aastra.cfg, .
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters UPnP Settings Parameter – upnp manager IP phone UI Aastra Web UI UPnP (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->UPnP Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Enables or disables Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on the IP phone. If you set this parameter to “0”, you can manually configure NAT on the IP phone and the UPnP manager will not start.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – upnp mapping lines Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg UPnP Mapping Lines (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the use of Universal Plug and Play (UpnP) on a specific line on the IP phone. Note: For this feature to work, UPnP must be enabled on the phone (upnp manager and upnp gateway must be set).
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – priority non-ip IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone->Priority ->Other Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Global aastra.cfg, .cfg Priority, Non-IP Packet (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the priority value for non-IP packets. This is a global setting.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tos priority map IP phone UI SIP Priority RTP Priority RTCP Priority Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone-> Priority->RTP (for LAN Port in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Phone-> Priority->RTCP Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 0 aastra.cfg, .
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters The following table identifies the default DSCP-to-priority mapping structure. DSCP Priority 0-7 0 8-15 1 16-23 2 24-31 3 32-39 4 40-47 5 48-55 6 56-63 7 D ra f t1 DSCP Range 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters PC Port (Ethernet Port 1) Parameters Parameter – vlan id port 1 IP phone UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN-> Passthrough->VLAN ID Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1 aastra.cfg, .cfg VLAN ID (for PC Port in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the VLAN ID used to pass packets through to a PC via Port 1.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – QoS eth port 1 priority IP phone UI Priority (for PC Port in Web UI) Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Description Specifies the priority value used for passing VLAN packets through to a PC via Port 1. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 to 7 Example QoS eth port 1 priority: 3 D ra f t1 Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->VLAN->Passthrough ->Priority Advanced Settings->Network->VLAN->Port 1 aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Type of Service (ToS)/DSCP Settings Parameter – tos sip IP phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Type of Service->SIP Advanced Settings->Network-> Type of Service,DSCP aastra.cfg, .cfg Configuration Files Description The Differentiated Services Code Point (DSCP) for SIP packets.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time and Date Settings Parameter – time format IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Time and Date->Time Format aastra.cfg, .cfg Time Format (in Phone UI) This parameter changes the time to 12 hour or 24 hour format. Use “0” for the 12 hour format and “1” for the 24 hour format.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst config IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Time and Date->Daylight Savings aastra.cfg, .cfg Daylight Savings (in Phone UI) Enables/disables the use of daylight savings time.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Name/Time Zone Code Table Time Zone Code AD-Andorra AE - United Arab Emirates (Dubai) AG-Antigua AI-Anguilla AL-Tirane AN-Curacao AR-Buenos Aires AS-Pago Pago AT-Vienna AU-Lord Howe AU-Tasmania AU-Melbourne AU-Sydney AU-Broken Hill AU-Brisbane AU-Lindeman AU-Adelaide AU-Darwin AU-Perth AW-Aruba AZ - Azerbaijan (Baku) CET GST AST AST CET AST ART BST CET LHS EST EST EST CST EST EST CST CST WST AST AZT BA-Sarajevo BB-Barbados BE-Brussels BG-Sofia BM-Ber
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code CA-Newfoundland CA-Atlantic CA-Eastern CA-Saskatchewan CA-Central CA-Mountain CA-Pacific CA-Yukon CH-Zurich CK-Rarotonga CL-Santiago CL-Easter CN-China CO-Bogota CR-Costa Rica CU-Havana CY-Nicosia CZ-Prague NST AST EST EST CST MST PST PST CET CKS CLS EAS CST COS CST CST EES CET EE-Tallinn ES-Madrid ES-Canary D FI-Helsinki FJ-Fiji FK-Stanley FO-Faeroe FR-Paris GB-London GB-Belfast GD-Grenada GE - Georgia (Tbilisi)
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code HK-Hong Kong HN-Tegucigalpa HR-Zagreb HT-Port-au-Prince HU-Budapest HKS CST CET EST CET IE-Dublin IS-Reykjavik IT-Rome GMT GMT CET JM-Jamaica JP-Tokyo EST JST KY-Cayman EST LC-St Lucia LI-Vaduz LT-Vilnius LU-Luxembourg LV-Riga AST CET EET CET EET CET EET CET AST AST CET MUT CST CST CST CST MST MST MST PST D ra f MC-Monaco MD-Chisinau MK-Skopje MQ-Martinique MS-Montserrat MT-Malta MU - Mauritius MX-Mexico City MX-Cancun MX-Merida MX-Mo
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code PA-Panama PE-Lima PL-Warsaw PR-Puerto Rico PT-Lisbon PT-Madeira PT-Azores PY-Asuncion EST PES CET AST WET WET AZO PYS RO-Bucharest RU-Kaliningrad RU-Moscow RU-Samara RU-Yekaterinburg RU-Omsk RU-Novosibirsk RU-Krasnoyarsk RU-Irkutsk RU-Yakutsk RU-Vladivostok RU-Sakhalin RU-Magadan RU-Kamchatka RU-Anadyr EET EET MSK SAM YEK OMS NOV KRA IRK YAK VLA SAK MAG PET ANA ra f t1 Time Zone Name CET SGT CET CET CET SRT CST
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Zone Code VA-Vatican CET YU-Belgrade CET D ra f t1 Time Zone Name 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Time Server Settings Parameter – time server disabled Aastra Web UI IP Phone UI‘ NTP Time Servers (in Web UI) Description Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, .cfg Enables or disables the time server. This parameter affects the time server1, time server2, and time server3 parameters.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – time server2 Aastra Web UI IP Phone UI‘ Time Server 2 (in Web UI) Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Time and Date Settings Options->Preferences-> Time and Date->Time Servers aastra.cfg, .cfg The secondary time server's IP address or qualified domain name. If the time server is enabled, and the primary time server is not configured or cannot be accessed the value for time server2 will be used to request the time from.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Custom Time Zone and DST Settings Configuration Files Description The number of minutes the timezone is offset from UTC (Coordinated Universal Time). This can be positive (West of the Prime Meridian) or negative (East of the Prim Meridian). Eastern Standard Time (EST) has a value of 300.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst [start|end] relative date Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies how to interpret the start and end day, month, and week parameters - absolute (0) or relative (1). Format Boolean Default Value N/A Range 0 (absolute) 1 (relative) Example dst [start|end] relative date: 1 t1 Absolute Time Configuration Files Description The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) dst end month: 6 D Example ra f t1 Parameter – dst end month A-56 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst start day Configuration Files Description The day of the month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 31. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 to 31 Example dst start day: 1 Parameter – dst end day Configuration Files Description The day of the month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 31. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 to 31 Description t1 ra f Parameter – dst start hour aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst end hour Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 0 (midnight) to 23 Example dst end hour: 23 Relative Time Configuration Files Description The month that DST starts. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December).
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description The month that DST ends. Valid values are 1 to 12 (January to December). Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (January) 2 (February) 3 (March) 4 (April) 5 (May) 6 (June) 7 (July) 8 (August) 9 (September) 10 (October) 11 (November) 12 (December) dst end month: 12 D Example ra f t1 Parameter – dst end month 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files Description The week in the specified month in which DST starts. Valid value is a positive or negative integer from 1 to 5.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files Description The day of the specified week in the specified month that DST starts on. Valid values are an integer from 1 to 7. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 1 (Sunday) 2 (Monday) 3 (Tuesday) 4 (Wednesday) 5 (Thursday) 6 (Friday) 7 (Saturday) Example dst start day: 1 Parameter – dst end day Configuration Files Default Value Range Example ra f Format aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – dst start hour Configuration Files Description The hour that DST starts. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23. Format Integer Default Value N/A Range 0 (midnight) to 23 Example dst start hour: 0 Parameter – dst end hour Configuration Files Description The hour that DST ends. Valid values are an integer from 0 (midnight) to 23.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Backlight Mode Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Parameter – backlight mode IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Preferences->Display->Backlight aastra.cfg, .cfg Backlight (in Phone UI) Description Allows you to turn the backlight on the LCD, On, Off, or Auto. “The Auto” setting sets the phone to turn off the backlighting after a period of inactivity.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Live Dialpad Settings Parameter – live dialpad IP phone UI Configuration Files Options->Preferences->Live Dialpad aastra.cfg, .cfg Live Dialpad (in Phone UI) Description Turns the “Live Dialpad” feature ON or OFF. With live dial pad ON, the IP phone automatically dials out and turns ON Handsfree mode as soon as a dial pad key or softkey is pressed.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Local Dial Plan Settings Parameter – sip dial plan Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, .cfg Local Dial Plan (in Web UI) A dial plan describes the number and pattern of digits that a user dials to reach a particular telephone number. The SIP local dial plan is as follows: Symbol Description 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9 Digit symbol X Match any digit symbol (wildcard) *, #, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip dial plan terminator Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, .cfg Send Dial Plan Terminator (in Web UI) Allows you to enable or disable a dial plan terminator.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Basic, Global Settings SIP Global Authentication Settings IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Screen Name (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used to display text on the screen of the phone. You may want to set this parameter to display the user’s name of the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip user name IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Administrator Menu->SIP Settings Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Phone Number (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the IP phone at the registrar. Note: The IP Phones support Usernames containing dots (“.”).
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Authentication Name (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip bla number Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg BLA Number (in Web UI) Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared across all IP phones. Format Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example sip bla number: 1010 Parameter – sip mode Aastra Web UI t1 Description Allows you to configure the mode of the line.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Global Network Settings. IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Proxy Server (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests. A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the targeted user. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not applicable Example sip proxy ip: 192.168.0.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip backup proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Backup Proxy Server (in Web UI) Description The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip outbound proxy port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg outbound proxy port (in Web UI) The proxy port on the proxy server to which the IP phone sends all SIP messages.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registrar port IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Registrar Port (in Web UI) Configuration Files Description The registrar's port number. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range Not Applicable Example sip registrar port: 5060 Parameter – sip backup registrar ip Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, .
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip backup registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Backup Registrar Port (in Web UI) Description The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Basic, Per-Line Settings The following parameters are SIP per-line settings. The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. SIP Per-Line Authentication Settings Parameter – sip lineN screen name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Screen Name (in Web UI) Used to display text on the screen of the phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN user name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Phone Number (in Web UI) Description Used in the name field of the SIP URI for the IP phone and for registering the IP phone at the registrar. When configuring per-line BLA on an ININ server, the username must be incremented as shown in the example for the "sip lineN bla number" parameter on page A-79.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN auth name Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Authentication Name (in Web UI) Used in the username field of the Authorization header field of the SIP REGISTER request.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN bla number Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg BLA Number (in Web UI) Allows you to assign a phone number that is shared on specific lines on the IP phone. For Sylantro Server: When configuring the BLA feature on a Sylantro server, the value set for the sip lineN bla number parameter shall be the same value set for the sip lineN user name parameter for all the phones in the group.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN mode Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Line Mode (in Web UI) Allows you to configure the mode of the line.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Per-Line Network Settings. Parameter – sip lineN proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Proxy Server (in Web UI) The IP address of the SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses to send all SIP requests. A SIP proxy is a server that initiates and forwards requests generated by the IP phone to the targeted user. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip linex backup proxy ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Backup Proxy Server (in Web UI) The IP address of the backup SIP proxy server for which the IP phone uses when the primary SIP proxy is unavailable. Format IP address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.0.0.0 Range Not Applicable Example sip line1 backup proxy ip: 192.168.0.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN outbound proxy Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Outbound Proxy Server (in Web UI) This is the address of the outbound proxy server. All SIP messages originating from the phone are sent to this server. For example, if you have a Session Border Controller in your network, then you would normally set its address here. Format IP Address or fully qualified Domain Name Default Value 0.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN registrar ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .cfg Registrar Server (in Web UI) The address of the registrar for which the IP phone uses to send REGISTER requests. A SIP registrar is a server that maintains the location information of the IP phone. A global value of 0.0.0.0 disables registration.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Line 1 thru 9 aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip linex backup registrar port Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->LineN-> Basic SIP Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Backup Registrar Port (in Web UI) Description The backup registrar's (typically the backup SIP proxy) port number.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters BLA Support for MWI Parameter – sip mwi for bla account Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings MWI for BLA Account (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables a BLA configured line to send an MWI SUBSCRIBE message for the BLA account. Default Value Range 0 (disabled) 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) sip mwi for bla account: 1 D Example Boolean ra f Format t1 Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Centralized Conferencing Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip centralized conf Aastra Web UI Advanced->Global SIP Settings-> Basic SIP Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Conference Server URI (in Web UI) Description Globally enables or disables SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone as follows: • To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Settings Parameter – sip lineN centralized conf Aastra Web UI Advanced->Line <1 thru 9>-> Basic SIP Network Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Conference Server URI (in Web UI) Description Enable or disable per-line SIP centralized conferencing for an IP phone as follows: • To disable centralized conferencing, leave this field empty (blank).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters SIP Join Feature for 3-Way Conference Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the phone to allow a conference to be set up with a join header as described in RFC 3911. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip join support: 1 D ra f t1 Parameter – sip join support A-90 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters HTTP/HTTPS Authentication Support for Broadsoft CMS Parameter – http digest username Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the username to use for HTTP/HTTPS digest authentication. The server uses this username for authentication purposes when loading configuration to the phone over HTTP/HTTPS. This parameter initiates a “Username/Password” screen after pressing the Log In softkey. Notes: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – http digest force login Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables and disables the display of a LOGIN key on the phone’s idle screen. Note: After the server has authenticated the phone, this parameter must be set to “0” in order for the server to send the default profile to the phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – Aastra Web UI sip explicit mwi subscription period Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Explicit MWI Timeout (in Web UI) The requested duration, in seconds, before the MWI subscription times out. The phone re-subscribes to MWI before the subscription period ends.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip send line Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Send Line Number in REGISTER Message (in Web UI) Adds an "Aastra-Line:" header to the SIP REGISTER messages sent from the phone to the call server, where the value is the MAC address of the phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip T1 timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg T1 Timer (in Web UI) This timer is a SIP transaction layer timer defined in RFC 3261. Timer 1 is an estimate, in milliseconds, of the round-trip time (RTT).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip transaction timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Transaction Timer (in Web UI) The amount of time, in milliseconds that the phone allows the callserver (registrar/proxy) to respond to SIP messages that it sends.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip transport protocol Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Transport Protocol (in Web UI) Description The protocol that the Real-Time Transport Protocol (RTP) port on the IP phone uses to send out SIP signaling packets. t1 Notes: 1. If you set the value of this parameter to 4 (TLS), the phone checks to see if the “sips persistent tls” is enabled.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registration retry timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Registration Failed Retry Timer (in Web UI) Specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits between registration attempts when a registration is rejected by the registrar.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip registration renewal timer Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Registration Renewal Timer (in Web UI) Description The length of time, in seconds, prior to expiration, that the phone renews registrations.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip acd subscription period Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP ->Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg ACD Subscription Period (in Web UI) Specifies the time period, in seconds, that the IP phone resubscribes the Automatic Call Distribution (ACD) subscription service after a software/ firmware upgrade or after a reboot of the IP phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Missed Call Summary Subscription Settings Global Parameters Parameter – sip missed call summary subscription Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip missed call summary subscription period Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription Period (in Web UI) Description Specifies the amount of time, in seconds, that the phone uses the Missed Calls Summary Subscription feature. This parameter is always enabled with a default value of 86400 seconds.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Parameter Parameter – sip lineN missed call summary subscription Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Missed Call Summary Subscription (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the Missed Call Summary Subscription feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters As-Feature-Event Subscription Settings Aastra Web UI: Description Enables or disables the specified line with the BroadSoft’s server-side DND, CFWD, or ACD features.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Transport Layer Security (TLS) Settings To configure TLS, you must enter the “sip transport protocol” parameter with a value of “4” (TLS). See the “sip transport protocol” description on page A-97. Also enter the following parameters in the configuration files to configure TLS: Parameter – sips persistent tls Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the use of Persistent Transport Layer Security (TLS).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips root and intermediate certificates Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, .cfg Root and Intermediate Certificates Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the SIP Root and Intermediate Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips local certificate Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, .cfg Local Certificate Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the Local Certificate file to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. This parameter is required when configuring TLS (optional for Persistent TLS.) Note: The certificate file must use the format “.pem”.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sips trusted certificates Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->TLS Support aastra.cfg, .cfg Trusted Certificates Filename (in Web UI) Description Allows you to specify the Trusted Certificate files to use when the phone uses the TLS transport protocol to setup a call. t1 The Trusted Certificate files define a list of trusted certificates.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters 802.1x Support Settings Use the following parameters to configure the 802.1x Protocol on your phone using the configuration files. For EAP-MD5 use: eap type • identity • md5 password • pc port passthrough enabled For EAP-TLS use: t1 • eap type • identity • 802.1x root and intermediate certificates (use 1 root and 0 or 1 intermediate certificates) • 802.1x local certificate (use 1 local certificate) D • ra f • 802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – pc port passthru enabled IP phone UI Aastra Web UI PC Port PassThru Enable/ Disable (in Web UI) Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link Advanced Settings->Network-> Basic Network Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Enables or disables the PC port on the phone to be used for 802.1x authentication support.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – identity IP Phone UI: Identity (in Web UI) Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet Link-> 802.1x Settings->EAP-MD5 Settings Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the identity or username used for authenticating the phone. Note: The value you enter for this parameter also displays in the Aastra Web UI at the path Advanced Settings-> 802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – 802.1x root and intermediate certificates Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Root and Intermediate Certificates (in Web UI) Specifies the file name that contains the root and intermediate certificates related to the local certificate. Format String Default Value N/A Range N/A Example 802.1x root and intermediate certificates: filename.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – 802.1x private key Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->802.1x Support-> EAP-TLS Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Private Key (in Web UI) Specifies the file name that contains the private key. Format String Default Value ANDN/A Range N/A Example 802.1x private key: filename.pem Parameter – 802.1x trusted certificates Aastra Web UI: Format Default Value Range Example ra f Description Advanced Settings->802.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters RTP, Codec, DTMF Global Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip rtp port RTP Port Base (in IP Phone UI) IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Administrator Menu-> SIP Settings->RTP Port Base Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg RTP Port (in Web UI) Description Indicates the port through which the RTP packets are sent.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip use basic codecs Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Basic Codecs (in Web UI) Enables or disables basic codecs. Enabling this parameter allows the IP phone to use the basic Codecs when sending/receiving RTP packets.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip customized codec Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Customized Codec Preference List (in Web UI) Specifies a customized Codec preference list which allows you to use the preferred Codecs for this IP phone. Format Comma-separated list of semicolon-separated values Default Value Not Applicable Range Valid values for the syntax are: payload 0 for G.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip srtp mode Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> RTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg RTP Encryption (in Web UI) Description This parameter determines if SRTP is enabled on this IP phone, as follows: • If set to 0, then disable SRTP. • If set to 1 then SRTP calls are preferred. • If set to 2, then SRTP calls only are generated/accepted.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Per-Line Settings Parameter – sip lineN dtmf method Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg DTMF Method (in Web UI) Sets the Dual-tone multifrequency (DTMF) method to use on the IP phone for a specific line.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Autodial Settings Global Settings Parameter – sip autodial number Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Autodial Number (in Web UI) Globally specifies the SIP phone number that the IP phone autodials when the handset is lifted from the phone cradle. An empty (blank) value disables autodial on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip autodial timeout Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Autodial Timeout (in Web UI) Description Globally specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip lineN autodial timeout Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->LineN->Autodial Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg AutoDial Timeout (in Web UI) Description On a per-line basis, this parameter specifies the time, in seconds, that the phone waits to dial a preconfigured number after the handset is lifted from the IP phone cradle.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Voicemail Settings Parameter – sip lineN vmail Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Note: The value of "N" is 1 - 9 for 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, 6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT. Use this parameter in the .cfg file to configure the phone to dial a specific number to access an existing voicemail account on a Service Provider’s server. The user then follows the voicemail instructions for listening to voicemails.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Directory Settings Parameter – directory 1 Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Directory aastra.cfg, .cfg Directory List (in Web UI) The name of a directory list that you can download from the configuration server. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example directory 1: companylist.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the Directory on the IP phone. If this parameter is set to 0, users can access the Directory List via the IP phone UI. If this parameter is set to 1, the Directory List does not display on the IP phone and the Directory key is disabled. On the 6757i and 6757i CT the "Directory" option is also removed from the "Services" menu.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Customize Callers List and Services Key Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to specify a specific URI for accessing services after pressing the Services key. When this parameter is set, it overrides the standard function of the Services key. Format Alphanumeric characters Default Value N/A Range N/A Example services script: http://10.50.100.234/test.xml Parameter – callers list script Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Forward Settings IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Options->Call Forward Basic Settings->Account Configuration aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the ability to configure Call Forwarding. If this parameter is set to 0, a user and administrator can configure Call Forwarding via the Aastra Web UI and the IP Phone UI using the "Call Forward" options.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Forward Key Mode Settings Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Sets the mode for how the phone uses “call forwarding” (CFWD) • account The account mode allows you to configure CFWD on a per account basis. Pressing a configured CFWD key applies to the account in focus. • phone The Phone mode allows you to set the same CFWD configuration for all accounts (All, Busy, and/or No Answer).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Example The following is an example of configuring the CFWD key mode in the configuration files: call forward key mode: 2 softkey1 type: call forward softkey1 states: idle connected incoming outgoing busy D ra f t1 In the above example, softkey 1 is configured for CFWD on line 1 (account 1) with a “custom” configuration. Pressing softkey 1 displays CFWD screens for which you can customize on the phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters LLDP-MED and ELIN Settings Parameter– lldp Configuration Files IP Phone UI LLDP Support (IP Phone UI) Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Options->Administrator Menu-> Network Settings->Ethernet&VLAN-> LLDP Support Advanced Settings->Network-> Advanced Network Settings LLDP (in Web UI) Enables or disables Link Layer Discovery Protocol for Media Endpoint Devices (LLDP-MED) on the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– use lldp elin Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Basic Settings->Preferences->General Use LLDP ELIN (in Web UI) Enables or disables the use of an Emergency Location Identification Number (ELIN) received from LLDP as a caller ID for emergency numbers.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Missed Calls Indicator Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the Missed Calls Indicator. If the "missed calls indicator disabled" parame.ter is set to 0, the indicator increments as unanswered calls come into the IP phone. If the "missed calls indicator disabled" parameter is set to 1, the indicator is disabled and will NOT increment as unanswered calls come into the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters XML Settings Configuration Files Description Allows you to specify a timeout value, in seconds, that the phone waits for the far side to return a response after accepting the HTTP GET connection. If the far side accepts the GET connection but never returns a response, it blocks the phone until it is rebooted. If you enter a value greater than 0 for this parameter, the phone times out and will not be blocked.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – xml application title Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML->Services aastra.cfg, .cfg XML Application Title (in Web UI) This parameter allows you to rename the XML application in the IP phone UI (Services->4. Custom Feature). By default, when you load an XML application to the IP phone, the XML application title is called "Custom Feature". The "xml application title" parameter allows you to change that title.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – xml beep notification Aastra Web UI Basic Settings->Preferences Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg XML Beep Support (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables a BEEP notification on the phone when a status message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus) containing a “beep” attribute arrives to the phone. Changes to this parameter are applied immediately.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Action URI Settings Parameter – action uri startup Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, .cfg Startup (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a startup event occurs.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – action uri registered Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, .cfg Successful Registration (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when a successful registration event occurs.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– action uri registration event Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Advanced Settings->Action URI Registration Event (in Web UI) Description Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when a registration event change occurs.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – action uri incoming Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, .cfg Incoming Call (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an incoming call event occurs.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Example action uri outgoing: http://10.50.10.140/ outgoing.php?number=$$REMOTENUMBER$$ Parameter – action uri offhook Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI aastra.cfg, .cfg Offhook (in Web UI) Specifies the URI for which the phone executes a GET on when an offhook event occurs.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Action URI->Event aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the URI that the phone executes a GET on, when it transitions from the incoming, outgoing, calling, or connected state into the idle state.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters XML SIP Notify Settings Parameter – sip xml notify event Aastra Web UI: Advanced Settings->Global SIP-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables or disables the phone to accept or reject an aastra-xml SIP NOTIFY message. Note: To ensure the SIP NOTIFY is coming from a trusted source, it is recommended that you enable the Whitelist feature (Whitelist Proxy parameter) on the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Polling Action URI Settings Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Action URI Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the URI to be called every "action uri poll interval" seconds. Format HTTP(s) server path or Fully Qualified Domain Name Default Value N/A Range N/A Example action uri poll: http://myserver.com/myappli.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Ring Tone and Tone Set Global Settings Parameter – ring tone IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Options->Tones->Set Ring Tone Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, .cfg Global Ring Tone (in Web UI) Globally sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – tone set IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Options->Tones->Tone Set Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, .cfg Tone Set (in Web UI) Globally sets a tone set for a specific country.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Ring Tone Per-Line Settings Parameter – lineN ring tone Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->Ring Tones aastra.cfg, .cfg N=1 through 9 Line N (in Web UI) Description Sets the type of ring tone on the IP phone on a per-line basis. Ring tone can be set to one of six distinct rings. Note: LineN is applicable to lines 1 through 9. Not applicable to the 6751i.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing Setting Parameter – incoming call cancels dialing Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables how the phone handles incoming calls while the phone is dialing out.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Description (Cont’d) Transfer/Conference Call Behavior If you are dialing the phone to transfer or conference a call, and your phone receives an incoming call, your dialing is never interrupted (regardless of whether the “Incoming Call Interrupts Dialing” is enabled or disabled). For Transfer and Conference, the incoming calls always go to an available line (other than the one you are using for dialing) and the incoming call’s line LED blinks.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Switch Focus to Ringing Line Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies whether or not the UI focus is switched to a ringing line while the phone is in the connected state.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Preferred Line and Preferred Line Timeout Configuration Files Aastra Web UI Parameter– preferred line aastra.cfg, .cfg Basic Settings->Preferences->General Preferred Line (in Web UI) Specifies the preferred line to switch focus to when incoming or outgoing calls end on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call Parameter – goodbye cancels incoming call Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Goodbye Key Cancels Incoming Call (in Web UI) Description Enable or disables the behavior of the Goodbye Key on the IP phone. When you enable this parameter (1 = enable), the Goodbye key rejects the incoming call.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Stuttered Dial Tone Setting Parameter – stutter disabled Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Stuttered Dial Tone (in Web UI) Enable or disables the playing of a stuttered dial tone when there is a message waiting on the IP phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (false) Range 0 (false) 1 (true) Example stuttered disabled: 1 D ra f t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Call Waiting Settings Parameter – call waiting Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Call Waiting (in Web UI) Description Allows you to enable or disable Call Waiting on the IP phone. If you enable call waiting (default), the user has the option of accepting a second call while currently on the first call.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – call waiting tone Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Play Call Waiting Tone (in Web UI) Description Enable or disables the playing of a call waiting tone when a caller is on an active call and a new call comes into the phone. Note: The Call Waiting Tone feature works only if the Call Waiting parameter is enabled.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters DND Key Mode Settings Parameter – dnd key mode Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences->General Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Sets the mode for how the phone uses “do not disturb” (DND): account • phone • custom Sets DND for a specific account. DND key toggles the account in focus on the IP Phone UI, to ON or OFF. Sets DND ON for all accounts on the phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Priority Alert Settings Parameter – priority alerting enabled Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Enable Priority Alerting (in Web UI) Enables and disables distinctive ringing on the IP phone for incoming calls and call-waiting calls.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alert community 1 community-1 (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg When an "alert community-1” keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alert community 3 Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg community-3 (in Web UI) When an "alert community-3” keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alert external alert external (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg When an "alert external" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alert group Group (in Web UI) Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg When an "alert group" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – alert priority Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files alert priority (in Web UI) Basic Settings->Preferences-> Priority Alerting Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg When an "alert priority" keyword appears in the header of the INVITE request, the configured Bellcore ring tone is applied to the IP phone.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– bellcore cadence dr3 Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr3. Note: You can define up to 8 cadence rings. The value of -1 indicates “do not repeat”. Integer Default Value 400,200,400,200,800,4000 Range N/A Example bellcore cadence dr3: 400,200,400,200,800,4000 Parameter– bellcore cadence dr4 Configuration Files Description Sets the cadence for Bellcore-dr4. t1 Format aastra.cfg, .
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Language Settings Parameter – language IP Phone UI Aastra Web UI Options->Language Basic Settings->Preferences-> Language Settings->Webpage Language aastra.cfg, .cfg Webpage Language (in Web UI) Configuration File Description The language you want to display in the IP Phone UI and the Aastra Web UI.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter– input language IP Phone UI: Aastra Web UI: Configuration Files Language->Input Language Basic Settings->Preferences->Language Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Input Language (in Web UI) Allows you to specify the language to use for inputs on the IP Phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Language Pack Settings Parameter – language N Aastra Web UI Configuration File Basic Settings->Preferences-> Language Settings .cfg Language N (in Web UI) Where “N” can be 1, 2, 3, or 4 Description The language pack you want to load to the IP phone. Valid values are: t1 lang_de.txt (German)* lang_es.txt (Spanish) lang_es_mx.txt (Mexican Spanish) lang_fr.txt (French) lang_fr_ca.txt (Canadian French) lang_it.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters The following table identifies the language code to use for the IP phone language packs. Language Codes (from Standard ISO 639) Language Language Code English en European French fr French Canadian fr_ca European Spanish es Mexican Spanish es_mx de Italian it t1 German The following table identifies the country codes to use for the IP phone language packs.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code BAHAMAS BAHRAIN BANGLADESH BARBADOS BELARUS BELGIUM BELIZE BENIN BERMUDA BHUTAN BOLIVIA BOSNIA AND HERZEGOVINA BOTSWANA BOUVET ISLAND BRAZIL BRITISH INDIAN OCEAN TERRITORY BRUNEI DARUSSALAM BULGARIA BURKINA FASO BURUNDI BS BH BD BB BY BE BZ BJ BM BT BO BA BW BV BR IO BN BG BF BI ra f t1 Country D CAMBODIA CAMEROON CANADA CAPE VERDE CAYMAN ISLANDS CENTRAL AFRICAN REPUBLIC CHAD CHILE CHINA CHRISTMAS ISLAND COCOS (KEE
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code DENMARK DJIBOUTI DOMINICA DOMINICAN REPUBLIC DK DJ DM DO ECUADOR EGYPT EL SALVADOR EQUATORIAL GUINEA ERITREA ESTONIA ETHIOPIA EC EG SV GQ ER EE ET FALKLAND ISLANDS (MALVINAS) FAROE ISLANDS FIJI FINLAND FRANCE FRENCH GUIANA FRENCH POLYNESIA FRENCH SOUTHERN TERRITORIES FK FO FJ FI FR GF PF TF ra f D GABON GAMBIA GEORGIA GERMANY GHANA GIBRALTAR GREECE GREENLAND GRENADA GUADELOUPE GUAM GUATEMALA GUERNSEY GUINEA GUINEA-BISSAU GUYANA t1 Country
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code ICELAND INDIA INDONESIA IRAN, ISLAMIC REPUBLIC OF IRAQ IRELAND ISLE OF MAN ISRAEL ITALY IS IN ID IR IQ IE IM IL IT JAMAICA JAPAN JERSEY JORDAN JM JP JE JO KAZAKHSTAN KENYA KIRIBATI KOREA, DEMOCRATIC PEOPLE'S REPUBLIC OF KOREA, REPUBLIC OF KUWAIT KYRGYZSTAN KZ KE KI KP KR KW KG LAO PEOPLE'S DEMOCRATIC REPUBLIC LATVIA LEBANON LESOTHO LIBERIA LIBYAN ARAB JAMAHIRIYA LIECHTENSTEIN LITHUANIA LUXEMBOURG LA LV LB LS LR LY
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code MACAO MACEDONIA, THE FORMER YUGOSLAV REPUBLIC OF MADAGASCAR MALAWI MALAYSIA MALDIVES MALI MALTA MARSHALL ISLANDS MARTINIQUE MAURITANIA MAURITIUS MAYOTTE MEXICO MICRONESIA, FEDERATED STATES OF MOLDOVA, REPUBLIC OF MONACO MONGOLIA MONTENEGRO MONTSERRAT MOROCCO MOZAMBIQUE MYANMAR MO MK MG MW MY MV ML MT MH MQ MR MU YT MX FM MD MC MN ME MS MA MZ MM NAMIBIA NAURU NEPAL NETHERLANDS NETHERLANDS ANTILLES NEW CALEDONIA NEW ZEALAND NICARAGUA NIGER NIGERIA N
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code PAKISTAN PALAU PALESTINIAN TERRITORY, OCCUPIED PANAMA PAPUA NEW GUINEA PARAGUAY PERU PHILIPPINES PITCAIRN POLAND PORTUGAL PUERTO RICO PK PW PS PA PG PY PE PH PN PL PT PR QATAR QA RÉUNION ROMANIA RUSSIAN FEDERATION RWANDA RE RO RU RW D ra f t1 Country A-170 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code SAINT HELENA SAINT KITTS AND NEVIS SAINT LUCIA SAINT PIERRE AND MIQUELON SAINT VINCENT AND THE GRENADINES SAMOA SAN MARINO SAO TOME AND PRINCIPE SAUDI ARABIA SENEGAL SERBIA SEYCHELLES SIERRA LEONE SINGAPORE SLOVAKIA SLOVENIA SOLOMON ISLANDS SOMALIA SOUTH AFRICA SOUTH GEORGIA AND THE SOUTH SANDWICH ISLANDS SPAIN SRI LANKA SUDAN SURINAME SVALBARD AND JAN MAYEN SWAZILAND SWEDEN SWITZERLAND SYRIAN ARAB REPUBLIC SH KN LC PM VC WS SM ST SA SN RS SC SL SG
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Country Code UGANDA UKRAINE UNITED ARAB EMIRATES UNITED KINGDOM UNITED STATES UNITED STATES MINOR OUTLYING ISLANDS URUGUAY UZBEKISTAN UG TA AE GB US TM UY UZ VANUATU Vatican City State VENEZUELA VIET NAM VIRGIN ISLANDS, BRITISH VIRGIN ISLANDS, U.S.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Suppress DTMF Playback Setting Parameter – suppress dtmf playback Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, .cfg Suppress DTMF Playback (in Web UI) Description Enables and disables suppression of DTMF playback when a number is dialed from the softkeys or programmable keys.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Display DTMF Digits Setting Parameter – display dtmf digits Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->General aastra.cfg, .cfg Display DTMF Digits (in Web UI) Description Enables and disables the display of DTMF digits when dialing on the IP phone. DTMF is the signal sent from the phone to the network that you generate when you press the phone’s touch keys. This is also known as “touchtone” dialing.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Intercom, Auto-Answer, and Barge In Settings Outgoing Intercom Settings Parameter – sip intercom type Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Outgoing Intercom Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Type (in Web UI) Determines whether the IP phone or the server is responsible for notifying the recipient that an Intercom call is being placed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip intercom prefix code Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Outgoing Intercom Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Prefix Code (in Web UI) Description The prefix to add to the phone number for server-side outgoing Intercom calls. This parameter is required for all server-side Intercom calls. Note: The example below shows *96 for the prefix code which is used for Sylantro servers.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Incoming Intercom Settings Parameter – sip allow auto answer Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Incoming Intercom Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Auto-Answer (in Web UI) Enables or disables the IP phone to allow automatic answering for an Intercom call. If auto-answer is enabled on the IP phone, the phone plays a tone to alert the user before answering the intercom call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – sip intercom warning tone Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences-> Incoming Intercom Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Play Warning Tone (in Web UI) Enables or disables a warning tone to play when the phone receives an incoming intercom call on an active line.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Group Paging RTP Settings Parameter – paging addr list Aastra Web UI: Basic Settings->Preferences-> Group Paging RTP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the multicast address(es) and the port on which the phone listens for incoming multicast RTP packets. Note: If this field is blank, Paging listening capability is disabled on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Audio Transmit and Receive Gain Adjustment Settings Configuration Files Description This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the headset microphone to t he far-end party. The amount of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Configuration Files Description This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the handset microphone to the far-end party. The amount of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment. This parameter allows you to adjust the Tx gain settings to best suit your comfort level and deployment environment.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – handsfree tx gain Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description This is the increased (+db) or decreased (-db) amount of signal transmitted from the base microphone to the far-end party. The amount of Tx gain in the IP phone firmware has been reduced to avoid side-tone and echo on the local and far-end equipment.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters IP Phone UI Configuration Files Description Allows you to configure how the "handsfree" key on the IP phone operates. Format Integer Default Value 0 Range 0 Speaker - Calls can be made or received using the handset or handsfree speakerphone and can be switched between the two modes by pressing the d /fkey. When on speaker, you can return to using the handset by placing the handset on the cradle and picking it up again.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Directed Call Pickup (BLF or XML Call Interception) Settings Parameter – directed call pickup Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences ->Directed Call Pickup Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Directed Call Pickup (in Web UI) Enables or disables the use of "directed call pickup" feature.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Format Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range Not Applicable Example directed call pickup prefix: *98 Parameter – play a ring splash Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences ->Directed Call Pickup Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Play a Ring Splash (in Web UI) Enables or disables the playing of a short "call waiting tone" when there is an incoming call on the BLF monitored extension.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters ACD Auto-Available Timer Settings Parameter – acd auto available Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences ->Auto Call Distribution Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Auto Available (in Web UI) Enables or disables the use of the ACD Auto-Available Timer.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Park and Pickup Global Settings (9480i, 9480i CT, 6757i/6757i CT only) Parameter – sprecode Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, .cfg Park Call (in Web UI) Description Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you want to park an incoming call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Parameter – pickupsprecode Basic Settings->Preferences aastra.cfg, .cfg Pick Up Parked Call (in Web UI) Description Specifies the code to enter before entering the extension for where you want to pickup a parked call.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Mapping Key Settings This section provides the hard key settings you can use to enable and disable the Redial, Conf, and Xfer keys on the IP phone. Configuration Files Description Enables or disables the Redial key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is set to 1, pressing the Redial key is ignored, and the dialed number is not saved to the "Redial List".
IP Phone Administrator Guide Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – call transfer disabled Configuration Files Description Enables or disables the Xfer key on the IP phone. If this parameter is set to 0, the key is active and can be pressed by the user. If this parameter is set to 1, pressing the Xfer key is ignored.
Operational, Basic, and Advanced Parameters Parameter – map conf key to Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Basic Settings->Preferences->Key Mapping aastra.cfg, .cfg Map Conf Key To (in Web UI) Description Sets the Conf key as a speeddial key if a value is entered for this parameter. If you leave this parameter blank, the Conf key returns to its original functionality.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/ Expansion Module Key Parameters This section provides the softkey, programmable key, feature key, and expansion module key parameters you can configure on the IP phones. The following table provides the number of keys you can configure for each model phone and expansion module, and the number of lines available for each type of phone.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Softkey Settings for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of softkeys available on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT models. See the table above for applicable values. Parameter – softkeyN type Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Type (in Web UI) The type of softkey to configure.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters • • • • • • • ra f • webapps - Indicates the softkey is hardcoded to access an Aastra XML-based application (xml.myaastra.com). By default, Softkey 1 is assigned as the WebApps key on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT. (Not applicable to the CT handsets). Also accessible from the Services menu on these phones.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters none line speeddial dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI) blf list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI) acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI) dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI) xml webapps flash sprecode park pickup lcr call forward blf/xfer speeddial/xfer speeddial/conf callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI) dir icom services phonelock paging empty softkey1 type: line softkey2 type: speeddial softkey3 t
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – softkeyN label Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Label (in Web UI) Description The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – softkeyN value Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Value (In Web UI) Description This is the value you assign to the softkey.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range N/A Example softkey1 value: 9 softkey2 value: 411 softkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ softkey5 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix) D ra f t1 Format A-198 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – softkeyN line Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Line (in Web UI) Description This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – softkeyN states Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Idle, Connected, Incoming, Outgoing, Busy (in Web UI) Description Displays the status of the phone when a softkey is pressed. You can enter multiple values (idle, connected, incoming, outgoing, busy) for the "softkeyN state" parameter.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Valid values are: idle The phone is not being used. connected The line currently being displayed is in an active call (or the call is on hold) incoming The phone is ringing. outgoing The user is dialing a number, or the far-end is ringing. busy The current line is busy because the line is in use or the line is set as “Do Not Disturb” Note: For softkey type, Pickup, values can be: just idle, just outgoing, or idle outgoing.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Programmable Key Settings for 9143i, 6753i, and 6755i • Parameter – prgkeyN type The value of "N" for the following parameters is dependent on the number of programmable keys available on the phone models. See the table on page 192 for the applicable values. Aastra Web UI Operation->Programmable Keys Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Type (in Web UI) The type of programmable key to configure.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters • • • • • • • • ra f • flash - Indicates programmable key is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed. The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold). sprecode - Indicates programmable key is configured to automatically activate specific services offered by the server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters none line speeddial dnd ("do not disturb" in the Aastra Web UI) blf list (“BLF/List” in the Aastra Web UI) acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI) dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI) xml webapps flash sprecode park pickup lcr call forward directory callers(“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI) conf xfer blf/xfer speeddial/xfer speeddial/conf phonelock services paging empty A-204 prgkey3
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – prgkeyN value Aastra Web UI Operation->Programmable Keys Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Value (in Web UI) Description This is the value you assign to the programmable key.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Default Value N/A Range N/A Example prgkey3 value: 411 prgkey4 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix) Parameter– prgkeyN line Aastra Web UI Operation->Programmable Keys Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Line (in Web UI) Description This is the line associated with the programmable key you are configuring.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Top Softkey Settings for 6757i and 6757i CT Parameter – topsoftkeyN type Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Top Softkeys->Type (in Web UI) The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are: • none - Indicates softkey is disabled. • line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use. • speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters • • • • • • • • ra f • • flash - Indicates the softkey is set to generate a flash event when it is pressed, or a feature key is pressed on the CT handsets. The IP phone generates flash events only when a call is connected and there is an active RTP stream (for example, when the call is not on hold).
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters none line speeddial dnd blf list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI) acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI) dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI) xml webapps flash sprecode call forward park pickup blf/xfer speeddial/xfer speeddial/conf lcr callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI) directory icom services phonelock paging empty topsoftkey1 type: line topsoftkey2 type: speeddial topsoftkey3 type: lcr topsoftkey4 type
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – topsoftkeyN label Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Top Softkeys->Label (in Web UI) Description The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – topsoftkeyN value Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Top Softkeys->Value (In WEb UI) Description This is the value you assign to the softkey.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Integer Default Value Not Applicable Range N/A Example topsoftkey1 value: 9 topsoftkey2 value: 411 topsoftkey4 value: http://10.50.10.140 script.pl?name=$$SIPUSERNAME$$ topsoftkey5 value: 12345+ (example of a speeddial prefix) D ra f t1 Format A-212 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – topsoftkeyN line Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Softkeys and XML aastra.cfg, .cfg Top Softkeys->Line (in Web UI) Description This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring. The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Handset Feature Key Settings for the 9480i CT and 6757i CT Parameter – featurekeyN type Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Handset Keys aastra.cfg, .cfg Type (in Web UI) The type of feature key to configure. Valid types are: • none - Indicates feature key is disabled. • line - Indicates the feature key is configured for line use.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Example featurekey1 type: line featurekey2 type: public featurekey3 type: park featurekey4 type: pickup Parameter – featurekeyN label Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Handset Keys aastra.cfg, .cfg Label (in Web UI) Description The text label that displays on the IP phone for the feature key.
Expansion Module Key Settings for M670i (6753i, 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) and M675i (for 6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) Parameter – expmodX keyN type Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Expansion Module N aastra.cfg, .cfg Type (in Web UI) ra f t1 The type of softkey to configure. Valid types are: • none - Indicates softkey is disabled. • line - Indicates softkey is configured for line use. • speeddial - Indicates softkey is configured for speeddial use.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters • • • • • • • • • • ra f • • sprecode - Indicates the softkey is configured to automatically activate specific services offered by the server. For example, if the sprecode value of *82 is configured, then by pressing the softkey, *82 automatically activates a service provided by the server. park - Indicates the softkey is configured to park incoming calls when pressed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters t1 none line speeddial dnd blf list ("BLF\List" in the Aastra Web UI) acd (“Auto call distribution” in the Aastra Web UI) dcp (“Directed Call Pickup” in the Aastra Web UI) xml webapps flash sprecode park pickup lcr call forward blf/xfer speeddial/xfer speeddial/conf callers (“Callers List” in Aastra Web UI) directory icom services (not available on the 6753i) phonelock paging empty expmod1 key1 type: line ex
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – expmodX keyN label Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Expansion Module N aastra.cfg, .cfg Label (in Web UI) Description The text label that displays on the softkey for the Expansion Module.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – expmodX keyN value Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Expansion Module N aastra.cfg, .cfg Value (In WEb UI) Description The text label that displays on the IP phone for the softkey on the Expansion Module.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters expmod1 key1 value: 9 expmod1 key2 value: 411 expmod1 key3 value: 123456+ (example of a speeddial prefix) D ra f t1 Example 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter – expmodX keyN line Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Operation->Expansion Module N aastra.cfg, .cfg Line (in Web UI) Description This is the line associated with the softkey you are configuring on the Expansion Module. The number of applicable lines available is dependent on the specific IP phone model.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Customizing the Key Type List Softkeys, Programmable Keys, Expansion Module Keys Parameter – softkey selection list Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to specify which key types to display and the order in which to display them in the “Type” list for softkeys, programmable keys, and/or expansion module keys when configuring the keys in the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Default Value lcr • call forward • speeddial • blf/xfer • dnd • speeddial/xfer • blf • speeddial/conf • list • directory • acd • callers • dcp • conf (6753i, 9143i) • xml • xfer (6753i, 9143i) • webapps • icom • flash • services • sprecode t1 • line • park • pi ckup • phonelock • paging • empty (6755i, 6757i, 6757 CT, 9480i, 9480i CT) Any of the key types i
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Handset Feature Keys (for CT Models ONLY) Parameter – feature key selection list Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to specify which key types to display and the order in which to display them in the “Type” list for the feature keys (CT models only) when configuring the keys in the Aastra Web UI.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Locking Softkeys and Programmable Keys Parameter– softkeyN locked Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Locks the specified softkey on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, or 6757i CT IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter– prgkeyN locked Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Locks the specified top softkey on the 9143i, 6753i, or 6755i IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the programmable key. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Parameter– expmodX keyN locked Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Locks the specified top softkey on the 5-Series Expansion Module attached to the IP phone. Locking the key prevents a user from changing or configuring the softkey on the expansion module. When a key is locked, the phone uses the server settings and ignores any previous local configuration.
Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Locking the SAVE and DLETE Keys (6753i) Parameter– prgkey1 locked Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to lock or unlock the Save key on the 6753i IP Phone. When the Save key is unlocked, a User can change the function of the key using the Aastra Web UI. An Administrator can change the function of the key using the Aastra Web UI or the configuration files. Note: 1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Softkey/Programmable Key/Feature Key/Expansion Module Key Parameters Enabling/Disabling Ability to Add/Edit Speeddial Keys Parameter – speeddial edit Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to enable or disable the ability to add a speeddial key or edit a speeddial key.
Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display Expansion Module 1 through 3 Parameter– expanmodXpageNleft Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to specify a customized heading for the M675i expansion module, in the left column of a specific page.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Customizing M675i Expansion Module Column Display Parameter– expanmodXpageNright Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to specify a customized heading for the M675i expansion module, in the right column of a specific page.
Advanced Operational Parameters Advanced Operational Parameters The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set advanced operational features on the IP phones. Blind Transfer Setting Configuration Files Description Forces the phone to use the Blind Transfer method available in software prior to release 1.4. This method sends the CANCEL message after the REFER message when blind transferring a call.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Parameters Boot Sequence Recovery Mode Settings. Configuration Files Description Enables or disables the forcing web recovery mode feature. If this parameter is set to "1", you cannot force web recovery. If this parameter is set to "0", press 1 and # keys during boot up when the logo displays to force the web recovery mode.
Advanced Operational Parameters Single Call Restriction Setting Parameter – two call support Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Global SIP->RTP Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Two Call Support (in Web UI) Description Enables or disables the single media path restriction between the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and the handset. When this feature is enabled (set to 1), you can make separate active calls from the 6757i CT and 9480i CT base unit and from the cordless handset.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Parameters Blacklist Duration Setting Parameter – sip blacklist duration Aastra Web UI Advanced Settings->Global SIP Settings-> Advanced SIP Settings Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Blacklist Duration (Aastra Web UI) Description Specifies the length of time, in seconds, that a failed server remains on the server blacklist. The IP phone avoids sending a SIP message to a failed server (if another server is available) for this amount of time.
Advanced Operational Parameters XML Key Redirection Settings (for Redial, Xfer, Conf, Icom, Voicemail) Parameter– redial script Configuration Files Description Specifies a redial script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set, pressing the Redial key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in performing the redial action. Format String Default Value empty Range Any valid URI Example redial script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/redial.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Parameters Parameter– icom script Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies an Icom script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set, pressing the Icom key GETs the specified URI from the server to use in performing the Intercom action. Format String Default Value empty Range Any valid URI Example icom script: http://bluevelvet.ana.aastra.com/icom.
Advanced Operational Parameters Options Key Redirection Setting (Services key on 6751i) Parameter– options script Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies an Options script for the phone to use. When this parameter is set, pressing the Options Key (or Services Key on the 6751i) GETs the specified URI from the server. Note: Pressing and holding the Options key (or the Services Key on the 6751i) displays the local Options Menu on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Parameters XML Override for a Locked Phone Setting Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the method to use for overriding a locked phone when XML applications are sent to the phone. There are three settings for this parameter: 0 Phone prevents XML POSTs and XML GETs from being received or sent. 1 Phone allows XML POSTs; however, XML GETs by pressing the XML keys (softkeys/programmable keys/extension module keys) are not allowed.
Advanced Operational Parameters User-Agent Setting Parameter – sip user-agent Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Allows you to enable or disable the addition of the User-Agent and Server SIP headers in the SIP stack. The value of “0” prevents the UserAgent and Server SIP header from being added to the SIP stack. The value of “1” allows these headers to be added.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Advanced Operational Parameters DNS Query Setting Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Specifies the Domain Name Service (DNS) query method to use when the phone performs a DNS lookup. Format Integer Default Value 1 Range 0 A only - The phone sends “A” (Host IP Address) lookup for the IP address and uses the default port number of 5060. 1 SRV & A - The phone sends “SRV” (Service Location Record) lookup to get the port number.
Advanced Operational Parameters Ignore Out of Order SIP Requests Parameter– sip accept out of order requests Configuration Files aastra.cfg, .cfg Description Enables a workaround for non-compliant SIP devices (for example, Asterisk) which do not increment the CSeq numbers in SIP requests sent to the phone. Format Boolean Default Value 0 (disabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example sip accept out of order requests: 1 t1 Configuration Encryption Setting Configuration Files aastra.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Parameters Troubleshooting Parameters The following parameters in this section allow the system administrator to set logging and support settings for troubleshooting purposes. Log Settings Parameter – log server ip Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting-> Log Settings aastra.cfg, .cfg Log IP (in Web UI) Specifies the IP address for which to save log files for troubleshooting purposes. Format IP address Default Value 0.
Troubleshooting Parameters Parameters – log module Aastra Web UI Configuration Files Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting-> Module/Debug Level aastra.cfg, .cfg Module/Debug Level (in Web UI) Description Allows enhanced severity filtering of log calls sent as blog output. The blog, as used on the IP phones, is a an online debugging tool that can be frequently updated and intended for technical support analyzation.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Parameters Range Value Fatal Errors 1 (default) Errors 2 Warnings 4 Init 8 Functions 16 Info 32 All debug levels OFF 0 All Debug Levels ON 65535 Enter a debug level value in the “Debug Level” field for a module. t1 Examples Debug Level Example 1 ra f To turn two or more debug levels on at the same time, you add the value associated with each level.
Troubleshooting Parameters WatchDog Settings Parameter– watchdog enable Configuration Files Aastra Web UI aastra.cfg, .cfg Advanced Settings->Troubleshooting WatchDog (in Web UI) Enables/disables the use of the WatchDog task for the IP Phones. Format Boolean Default Value 1 (enabled) Range 0 (disabled) 1 (enabled) Example watchdog enable: 0 D ra f t1 Description 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Troubleshooting Parameters A-248 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
About this appendix Introduction t1 Appendix B Configuring the IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ra f This appendix describes how to setup a user’s phone with an extension to make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX. D Topics This appendix covers the following topics: Topic Page IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX page B-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX The following configuration illustrates how to create a user with an extension to make and receive calls using the Asterisk as the PBX. This configuration is defined in the sip.conf file present along with the other configuration files that are created when Asterisk is installed. Usually, the configuration files can be found at the /etc/asterisk directory. ;This is used in the “extensions.
IP Phone at the Asterisk IP PBX ;able to use it. In this example' sip' is used. You can use ;whatever you like, but make sure they are the same, you will ;need to make an entry in your extensions.conf file (which we ;will get to later) context=sip callerid="Phone 1" <1234> After this is defined in the “sip.conf” file, some information has to be entered in the “extensions.conf” file present in the same directory as the “sip.conf” file.
t1 ra f D
Appendix C Sample Configuration Files About this appendix t1 Introduction ra f This appendix provides sample configuration files for the 6757i, 6757i CT, and 6753i. Topics D This appendix covers the following topics: Topic Page Sample Configuration Files page C-2 6757i Sample Configuration File page C-2 6757i CT Sample Configuration File page C-12 6753i Sample Configuration File page C-29 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files Sample Configuration Files This section consists of the sample configuration files necessary to configure the IP phones. The general format is similar to configuration files used by several Unix-based programs. Any text following a number sign (#) on a line is considered to be a comment, unless the # is contained within double-quotes. Currently, Boolean fields use 0 for false and 1 for true.
Sample Configuration Files # The Aastra 6757i, 6757iCT, and 6753i phones will download 2 # configuration files from the TFTP server while restarting, the # "aastra.cfg" file and the ".cfg" file. These two configuration # files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with # the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line # settings, which should only be set in the ".cfg" file. # # The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while # the ".
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # Network Settings ## = = = = = = = = # Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network # settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you # may still have to set the dns address. #ip: # This value is unique to each phone on a server # and should be set in the ".cfg" file if # setting this manually.
Sample Configuration Files # NAT device between the server and the phone, then you must set the # following two parameters for the phone to function correctly. #sip nortel nat support: 1 # 1 = enabled #sip nortel nat timer: 60 # seconds between keep alive messages # Option 2: # # If you are using a session border controller, you should set the # outbound proxy to the session border controller address #sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files ## = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = # Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new # firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are # supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP ## TFTP server settings tftp server: 192.168.0.
Sample Configuration Files # # (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan # (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed # (3) A timeout occurs # # The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following # syntax: # # 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols # x : matches any digit (0...
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files #sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to # to the proxy in the dial string #------------------------------------------------------------------ # General SIP Settings #=========== #sip session timer: 30 # enable support of RFC4028, the default # value of 0 disables this functionality # messaging t1 #sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for sip # limit codecs to G711 and G729 #sip out-of-band dt
Sample Configuration Files sip screen name: Joe Smith # the name display on the phone's screen sip user name: 4256 # the phone number sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making # a call. sip vmail: *78 # the number to reach voicemail on sip auth name: jsmith # account used to authenticate user sip password: 12345 # password for authentication account sip mode: 0 # line type: 0 - generic, # 1 - BroadSoft SCA line # 2 - Nortel line t1 # sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files sip line3 vmail: *78 # configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line # of a test server sip line5 screen name: Test 1 sip line5 user name: 5551001 sip line5 display name: Test 1 sip line5 auth name: 5551001 sip line5 password: 5551001 sip line5 mode: 0 sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102 sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.
Sample Configuration Files # with it as seen here in the default softkey settings. # SOFTKEY TYPES: "line", "speeddial", "blf", "list", "dnd" # SOFTKEY LABEL: Alpha numeric name for the softkey. The maximum # number of characters for this value is 10 for # speeddials and dnd, 9 chars for lines, blf # SOFTKEY VALUE: If softkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from # 0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and # 'E' for On-hook can be set for the value.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files softkey8 line: 1 # list softkey11 type: list softkey12 type: list 6757i CT Sample Configuration File # Sample Configuration File # ========================= # Date: October 26th, 2005 t1 # Phone Model: 6757iCT # Notes: # ra f # The general format used here is similar to configuration files # used by several UNIX-based programs.
Sample Configuration Files # "aastra.cfg" file and the ".cfg" file. These two configuration # files can be used to configure all of the settings of the phone with # the exception of assigning a static IP address to a phone and line # settings, which should only be set in the ".cfg" file. # # The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while the # ".cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC address for # which the file is named (for example, "00085d0304f4.cfg").
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # Network Settings # ================ # Notes: If DHCP is enabled, you do not need to set these network # settings. Although depending on you DHCP server configuration you D ra f t1 # may still have to set the dns address. C-14 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Sample Configuration Files #ip: # This value is unique to each phone on a server # and should be set in the ".cfg" file if # setting this manually. #subnet mask: #default gateway: #dns1: #dns2: # Time Server Settings t1 # ==================== #time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files #sip nortel nat timer: 60 # seconds between keep alive messages # Option 2: # # If you are using a session border controller, you should set the # outbound proxy to the session border controller address #sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com #sip outbound proxy port: 0 # a value of 0 enables SRV # lookups for the address of t1 # the proxy.
Sample Configuration Files # Notes: This section defines which server the phone retrieves new # firmware images and configuration files from. Three protocols are # supported TFTP, FTP and HTTP download protocol: TFTP # valid values are TFTP, FTP and HTTP ## TFTP server settings tftp server: 192.168.0.130 #alternate tftp server: #use alternate tftp server: 1 # If your DHCP server assigns # a TFTP server address which t1 # you do not use, you can use # the alternate tftp server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # As you dial a number on the phone, the phone will initiate a call # when one of the following conditions are meet: # # (1) The entered number is an exact match in the dial plan # (2) The "#" symbol has been pressed # (3) A timeout occurs # # The dial plan is a regular expression that supports the following # syntax: # 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols # x : matches any digit (0...
Sample Configuration Files # with a 0 or 1, any 5 digit number # beginning with a number between 2 and 8 # (inclusive) or a 12 digit number # beginning with 91 #sip dial plan terminator: 1 # enable sending of the "#" symbol to # to the proxy in the dial string #------------------------------------------------------------------- t1 # General SIP Settings # ==================== #sip session timer: 30 # enable support of RFC4028, the default ra f # value of 0 disables this functionality #sip transpo
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # L1 to L4 on the 6757i and 6757iCT # L1 to L3 on the 6753i # # These can be over-ridden on a per-line basis using the per-line # settings. # # See the Admin Guide for a detailed explaination of how this works sip screen name: Joe Smith # the name display on the phone's screen sip user name: 4256 # the phone number sip display name: Joseph Smith # the caller name sent out when making # a call.
Sample Configuration Files # configure line 3 as the support Broadsoft SCA line # # - the proxy and registrar settings are taken from the global settings above sip line3 screen name: Support sip line3 user name: 4000 sip line3 display name: Aastra Support sip line3 auth name: support sip line3 password: 54321 sip line3 mode: 1 t1 sip line3 vmail: *78 # configure line 5 (a soft key line) as an ordinary line ra f # of a test server sip line5 screen name: Test 1 sip line5 user name: 5551001 sip line5
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # Softkeys can be set either server wide or unique to each phone. # Setting softkeys as line/call appearances should be done in the # ".cfg" file, since these are unique to each phone. # Notes: # # There are a maximum of 18 softkeys that can be configured on the # 6757i or 6757iCT phone. These can be set up through either of the 2 # configuration files, depending on whether this is to be server wide # ("aastra.cfg") or phone specific (".
Sample Configuration Files softkey2 type: speeddial softkey2 label: "Call Return" softkey2 value: *69 # DND Key softkey4 type: dnd softkey4 label: DND # Line appearance softkey6 type: line softkey6 label: Test 1 t1 softkey6 line: 5 # blf softkey8 type: blf softkey8 label: Jane Doe softkey8 line: 1 # list D softkey11 type: list ra f softkey8 value: 4559 softkey12 type: list #------------------------------------------------------------------- # Cordless Handset Feature Keys # ==================
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # aastra.cfg or the .cfg files. # # The feature keys are displayed when the user presses the F button # on the cordless phone's hand set. If any changes to the features # keys are made using these parameters the feature keys that exist on # the hand set have to be refreshed. To refresh the feature keys # simply open a new line or press one of the feature keys that are # available from the hand set.
Sample Configuration Files Feature key 0 Gr label: "Gr-Line 1" # German label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language # is set to use German Feature key 0 It label: "It-Line 1" # Italian label for the key. Displayed when the phone's language # is set to use Italian #Feature key 0 control: 1 # 1 - Make the key configurable by the user through the phone and # the phone's web client # t1 # 2 - Locks the key from user modifications.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # 58 - Menu (Options) # 59 - Feature Key # 60 - Redial # 61 - Directory # 62 - Callers' list # 63 - Services # 86 - Icom #Feature key 0 base event: 1 # Indicates a corresponding action to perform on the base set when # the "Feature key N hs event" is set to any value between 7-23.
Sample Configuration Files Feature key 0 hs event: 7 Feature key 0 base event: 1 Feature key 1 En label: "Conf." Feature key 1 Fr label: "Fr-Conf." Feature key 1 Sp label: "Sp-Conf." Feature key 1 control: 1 Feature key 1 hs event: 8 Feature key 1 base event: 12 Feature key 2 En label: "Xfer" Feature key 2 Fr label: "Fr-Xfer." Feature key 2 control: 2 Feature key 2 hs event: 9 ra f Feature key 2 base event: 11 t1 Feature key 2 Sp label: "Sp-Xfer.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files Feature key 5 hs event: 62 Feature key 5 control: 1 Feature key 5 base event: 13 Feature key 6 En label: "Top" Feature key 6 Fr label: "Fr-Top" Feature key 6 Sp label: "Sp-Top" Feature key 6 hs event: 17 Feature key 6 control: 1 Feature key 6 base event: 13 Feature key 7 Fr label: "Fr-Redial" Feature key 7 Sp label: "Sp-Redial" Feature key 7 hs event: 60 ra f Feature key 7 control: 4 t1 Feature key 7 En label: "Redial" Feature key 7 base event:
Sample Configuration Files 6753i Sample Configuration File # Sample Configuration File #= = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = = # Date: October 26th, 2005 # Phone Model: 6753i # Notes: # # The general format used here is similar to configuration files # used by several UNIX-based programs. Any text following a number t1 # sign (#) is considered to be a comment, unless the number sign is # contained within double-quotes ("#") where it is considered to be # a pound.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # The "aastra.cfg" file configures the settings server wide, while # the ".cfg" file configures only the phone with the MAC # address for which the file is named (for example, # "00085d0304f4.cfg"). The settings in the "aastra.cfg" file will # be overridden by settings which also appear in the ".cfg" file. #----------------------------------------------------------------- # DHCP Setting # ============= #dhcp: 1 # DHCP enabled.
Sample Configuration Files #ip: # This value is unique to each phone on a server # and should be set in the ".cfg" file if # setting this manually. #subnet mask: #default gateway: #dns1: #dns2: # Time Server Settings t1 # ===================== #time server disabled: 1 # Time server disabled. # Enable time server and enter at #time server2: # least one time server IP address or #time server3: ra f #time server1: # qualified domain name.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # seconds between keep alive messages D ra f t1 #sip nortel nat timer: 60 C-32 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Sample Configuration Files # Option 2: # # If you are using a session border controller, you should set the # outbound proxy to the session border controller address #sip outbound proxy: sbc.aastra.com #sip outbound proxy port: 0 # a value of 0 enables SRV # lookups for the address of # the proxy. # Option 3: # # If you know the public IP address of your NAT device and and have # assign this information. #sip nat ip: 67.123.122.
D ra f t1 IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files C-34 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Sample Configuration Files ## TFTP server settings tftp server: 192.168.0.130 #alternate tftp server: #use alternate tftp server: 1 # If your DHCP server assigns # a TFTP server address which # you do not use, you can use # the alternate tftp server. ## FTP server settings #ftp server: 192.168.0.131 # can be IP or FQDN #ftp username: aastra t1 #ftp password: 6757iaastra ## HTTP server settings (for http://bogus.aastra.com/firmware/) #http server: bogus.aastra.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files D ra f t1 # C-36 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Sample Configuration Files # 0,1,2,3,4,5,6,7,8,9,*,# : matches the keypad symbols # x : matches any digit (0...9) # + : matches 0 or more repetitions of the # # : previous expression [] : matches any number inside the brackets # : can be used with a "-" to represent a # : range # () : expression grouping # | : either or # # # If the dialled number doesn't match the dial plan then the call sip digit timeout: 3 t1 # is rejected.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files # General SIP Settings # ====================== #sip session timer: 30 # enable support of RFC4028, the default # value of 0 disables this functionality #sip transport protocol: 0 # use UDP (1), TCP (2) or both (0) for # sip messaging #sip use basic codecs: 1 # limit codecs to G711 and G729 #sip out-of-band dtmf: 0 # turn off support for RFC2833 (on by # Global SIP User Settings # ========================== ra f # t1 # default) # Notes: #
Sample Configuration Files sip auth name: jsmith # account used to authenticate user sip password: 12345 # password for authentication account sip mode: 0 # line type: # 0 - generic, # 1 - BroadSoft SCA line # 2 - Nortel line sip proxy ip: proxy.aastra.com # IP address or FQDN of proxy sip proxy port: 5060 # port used for SIP messages on the # proxy.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample Configuration Files sip line5 screen name: Test 1 sip line5 user name: 5551001 sip line5 display name: Test 1 sip line5 auth name: 5551001 sip line5 password: 5551001 sip line5 mode: 0 sip line5 proxy ip: 10.50.10.102 sip line5 proxy port: 5060 sip line5 registrar ip: 10.50.10.
Sample Configuration Files # PRGKEY VALUE: If prgkey type is a speeddial, any DTMFs (from # 0 - 9, *, "#") or a comma (,) for 500ms pause and # 'E' for On-hook can be set for the value. # If prgkey type is blf it is the extension you want # to monitor. # PRGKEY LINE: This is line associated with the prgkey. For line # prgkeys the value must be between 4 and 9 (1 - 3 # are already hardcoded as the L1, L2 and L3 hard # key line/call appearances).
t1 ra f D
Appendix D Sample BLF Softkey Settings About this appendix t1 Introduction ra f This appendix provides sample BLF softkey settings for both the Asterisk server and the BroadSoft BroadWorks server. Topics D This appendix covers the following topics: Topic Page Sample BLF Softkey Settings page D-2 Asterisk BLF page D-2 BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF page D-3 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Sample BLF Softkey Settings Sample BLF Softkey Settings Asterisk BLF The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable Asterisk BLF support on Aastra IP phones.
Sample BLF Softkey Settings BroadSoft BroadWorks BLF The following are sample softkey and programmable key configurations to enable Broadsoft BroadWorks Busy Lamp Field support on Aastra IP phones. 6757i and 6757i CT Configuration Parameters for Broadsoft BroadWorks BLF Note: One softkey must be defined of type “list” for EACH monitored user. So if there are 2 users being monitored, 2 softkeys must be defined of type list.
t1 ra f D
About this appendix Introduction t1 Appendix E Sample Multiple Proxy Server Configuration ra f This appendix provides a sample multiple proxy server configuration. Topics D This appendix covers the following topics: Topic Page Multiple Proxy Server Configuration page E-2 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Multiple Proxy Server Configuration Multiple Proxy Server Configuration Multiple proxy servers can be configured in the aastra.cfg file or the .cfg file. In the example below, the default proxy setting is used if no specific setting is specified in the line configuration. Line2 and line3 are used for the global proxy configurations, while line1 and line4 use their own specific settings. t1 #sip settings sip proxy ip: #.#.#.# sip proxy port: 5060 sip registrar ip: #.#.#.
Multiple Proxy Server Configuration sip sip sip sip line2 line2 line2 line2 mode: 0 user name: display name: screen name: #line 3 sip line3 sip line3 sip line3 sip line3 sip line3 sip line3 auth name: password: mode: 0 user name: display name: screen name: D ra f t1 #line 4 sip line4 auth name: sip line4 password: sip line4 mode: 0 sip line4 user name: sip line4 display name: sip line4 screen name: sip line4 proxy ip: %.%.%.% sip line4 proxy port: 5060 sip line4 registrar ip: %.%.%.
t1 ra f D
About this appendix Introduction t1 Appendix F Creating and Managing XML Applications ra f This appendix provides information required to create an XML application for use on the IP phones.
IP Phone Administrator Guide About this appendix Topic Page Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands) page F-43 XML URI for Key Press Simulation page F-60 Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone) page F-64 XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT only) page F-70 Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects page F-43 HTTP Post page F-84 XML Schema File page F-87 Managing XML Applications page F-90 page F-90 Non-Blocking HTTP Connections
Creating an XML Application Creating an XML Application Overview This section describes how to create an XML application for your IP phones. This section includes: XML format • Creating XML Objects • Creating Custom Softkeys • HTTP Post • XML Schema File t1 • XML format ra f The text in the Aastra XML objects must be compliant with XML recommendations and special characters must be escape encoded. The default character set for the XML API is ISO-8859-1.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Creating XML Objects This section describes how to create XML objects. The IP phone XML API supports the following proprietary objects that allow for the customization of the IP phone’s display.
Creating an XML Application Creating Custom Softkeys Developers can link arbitrary URIs to softkeys in the XML screens and can invoke softkey behavior to each XML screen type (Text Menu, Text Screen, User Input, Directory). A developer can define up to six softkeys before the closing tag of any object on the 9480i/9480i CT and 6757i/6757i CT. The following softkey functionality is available to the developer for the purpose of reordering or preserving the default functionality of the XML screens.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Text Menu Object (Menu Screens) The Text Menu object allows application developers to create a numerical list of menu items on the IP phones. The go-to line support, arrow indicator, and scroll key support are built into these objects, along with the "Select" and "Done" soft keys. You can also turn off automatic numbering of menu items using the style=”none" attribute or use bullets for lists instead of numbers using the style=”bullet”.
Creating an XML Application XML example: XML Screen Example: t1 Phone Services ra f Phone Services 1.Traffic Reports 2.Employee List 3.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Turning Off Automatic Numbering of Menu Items When implementing the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, you can turn off automatic numbering of the items in a list using the style=”none" attribute. XML Description: You use this attribute as follows. XML example: t1 Example
Creating an XML Application XML Screen Example: The following example shows the items in the Text Menu without the item numbering. Phone Services Traffic Reports Employee List Weather Select D ra f t1 Done 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Using Bullets in Menu Items When implementing the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object, you can use bullets to list items using the style=”bullet" attribute. XML Description: You use this attribute as follows. XML example: t1 Example
Creating an XML Application XML Screen Example: The following example shows the items in the Text Menu without the item numbering. Phone Services Traffic Reports Employee List Weather Select D ra f t1 Done 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Text Wrap for XML TextMenu Items The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object supports text wrapping on two lines for its items. This is done using a new attribute called "wrapList". This attribute allows you to specify the text wrapping to an additional line rather than truncating and dropping the text.
Creating an XML Application Configuring the Text Wrapping Parameter You use the following parameter with the XML AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object: • wrapList Example D ra f t1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Text Screen Object (Text Screens) You use the AastraIPPhoneTextScreen object to display text to the LCD screen on the IP Phone. The screen text wraps appropriately and can scroll to display a message longer then four lines. After implementing this object, text displays to the LCD on the IP phone. A user can scroll through the screens as required.
Creating an XML Application XML Example 1: Screen Object The screen object can be implemented similar to the firmware info screen. Note that white space is preserved in XML so the display should word-wrap appropriately. Only three lines can display at a time. Note: This example displays text that you can scroll through on the LCD screen. As you scroll the screen, the previous text is destroyed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Example 2: Screen Object For more information about this test, press Done. t1 Note: This example displays text that you can scroll through on the LCD screen.
Creating an XML Application XML Answer and Ignore Softkeys When the IP phone receives an XML application (either via a post or an incoming action URI) while a call is coming into the phone, the user can either answer or ignore the call with new softkeys that display (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT), or press the left and right arrow keys (9143i and 6753i), without canceling the XML application.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Example: SoftKey:Answer SoftKey:Ignore XML Screen Example: , *OHN 3MITH t1 !N 8-, APPLICATION CAN DISPLAY HERE WHILE A CALL IS COMING IN ra f !NSWER )GNORE For 9143i, 6753i: • An line displays on the LCD when the phone receives an incoming call at the same time it receives an XML application.
Creating an XML Application Implementation (9143i, 6753i) XML Example: Screen Object The screen object can be implemented similar to the firmware info screen. Note that white space is preserved in XML so the display should word-wrap appropriately. Only three lines can display at a time.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application • The second block displays below the first block. By default, the second text block displays as scrolling text. This block takes up as many lines as the XML developer specifies, up to the LCD screen size. • The third block displays below the second block. By default, the third block displays static text, and takes up whatever lines remain blank on the LCD screen.
Creating an XML Application XML Example: The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneFormattedTextScreen object with a static line at the top and bottom blocks and 2 scrolling lines in the middle block.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Note: You can view all 5 lines at once on the 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i and 6757i CT IP phones. You can view only 2 lines at a time (up to 5 lines) on the 9143i, 6751i, 6753i IP phone. Dialpad Passthrough for Objects t1 On the IP Phones, an XML Developer can control digit passthrough while the phone is in the connected state. (This feature is only applicable to phones in the connected state).
Creating an XML Application UserInput Object (User Input Screens) The AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object allows application developers to create screens for which the user can input text where applicable. (Line 1 is a title, Line 4 is an input prompt, and Line 5 is an input field). The IP phones support three parameter types: IP Addresses, Numbers (integers), and Strings. Each parameter has a URL tag that is used to send information back to the HTTP server.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Description: D ra f t1 Title string, usually same as menu title Enter IP address or host name Target receiving the input parameter added to URL
Creating an XML Application XML Example: Proxy Server Server IP: http://10.50.10.53/script.pl proxy XML Screen Example: Proxy Server t1 Server IP: Cancel Done D ra f Backspace Dot 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Implementation (Number) The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Numbers. Softkeys: • 1=Backspace, • 5=Cancel, • 6=Done XML Example: ra f XML Screen Example: t1 Proxy Port Port: http://10.50.10.53/script.
Creating an XML Application Implementation (String) The following is how you would implement the UserInput object using Strings in XML. Softkeys: 1=Backspace, • 2=Dot, • 3=Tri-Mode key, • 4=Nextspace, • 5=Cancel, • 6=Done t1 • XML Example: ra f SIP Settings Enter something http://10.50.10.53/script.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Softkey for Special Characters (User Input Screens for 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT only) The IP Phone can dynamically receive a Symbol List when it receives the AastraIPPhoneInputScreen XML object. You can have a single symbol specified for the softkey, or you can have a list of symbols. When there is only one symbol in the list, the symbol displays with no delay.
Creating an XML Application Implementation Softkeys: • 1 = XML Softkey Example: SoftKey:SymbolList="@#=&" XML Object and Softkey Example: D ra f t1 Email SoftKey:SymbolList="@" SoftKey:Exit
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Softkeys for Drop, Conf, and Xfer The Drop, Conf and Xfer softkeys can be customized to use with XML objects and display on XML screens as required. These custom softkeys are active ONLY in the connected state.
Creating an XML Application For all phones, once the user presses the custom softkey (Drop, Conf, Xfer), the softkey disappears after the action is performed. For example, after pressing the Xfer key on an active call from an XML screen, the Xfer key disappears and the dialing screen appears.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT IP Phone 9143i, 6753i Enter Current Time: 12:00:00am US Time Enter Current Time: 12:00:00am =Cancel =Enter Cancel Done International Time t1 Int Time Enter Current Time: Time 14:23:22 Int Time ra f IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT IP
Creating an XML Application United States Date US Date Enter Birthday: Date 12/22/1980 IP Phones 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT IP Phone 9143i, 6753i Enter Birthday: 12/22/1980 US Date Enter Birthday: 12/22/1980 =Enter t1 =Cancel Cancel Done ra f International Date D Int Date Enter
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Note: If you don’t specify a date, the XML script uses the current date in the specified format. Multiple Input Fields (User Input Screens) You can have multiple input fields per AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object.The following specifications apply to this feature: Multiple input fields are applicable to 9480i. 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT IP phones only. • Each AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object can support up to 6 input fields.
Creating an XML Application You use the following attributes to create multiple input fields using the AastraIPPhoneInputScreen object. New AastraIPPhoneInputScreen Attributes defaultIndex Allows you to set an integer value from 1 - 6 that specifies which input field the edit cursor starts in. Default is 1. displayMode Allows you to set a specific display mode for the screen: “normal” or “condensed”. Default is “normal” mode. Normal Mode - Prompts and inputs each appear on separate lines on the display.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Time: time 10:50:24AM Softkey:Submit t1 Posting the above AastraIPPhoneInputScreen XML script displays the following screens on the IP phone.
Creating an XML Application Scolling down changes to the next input field. Screen 2 Test Name: Robert Time: 10:50:24 AM ____________________ Cancel Done - t1 Screen 2 Note: Notice that the softkeys change to reflect the new input type, timeUS. ra f Scrolling down again goes to the next page of inputs. Screen 3 Test D Date 11/24/07 ____________________ DateDone - Screen 3 Note: Notice that the softkeys change again to reflect the current input item on the screen (Date).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Condensed Mode Screen If you use the attribute “displayMode = “condensed” in the root tag (Screen 4), the display changes to have prompt and inputs on the same line. The behavior of the screens using “condensed” mode is the same as Screens 1 through 3 but without the scrolling. Screen 4 Test Name: Robert | Time: 10:50:24 AM Date: 11/24/07 t1 ____________________ D ra f - NameDone F-38 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Creating an XML Application Directory Object (Directory List Screen) The Directory object allows you to browse an online directory in real time. It displays an automatically numbered list of contacts. By selecting a contact with the cursor, the contact can be dialed directly by pressing the "Dial" softkey or picking up the receiver. The Directory object has the optional softkeys of "Previous" and "Next" which can be linked to other XML objects.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Example: XML Screen Example:: t1 next="more.xml" previous="back.xml"> My Directory My Directory (1/6) D ra f 1. 480i John Doe 1 2.
Creating an XML Application Status Message Object (Idle Screen) The IP phones support an XML AastraIPPhoneStatus object for displaying status messages on a single designated line on the phone’s idle screen. The messages display when the server pushes XML information to the phone. The 6757i/6757i CT phones display messages on the second line in the phone window. (where “No Service” would display if there was no service.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Examples Example 1: The following is an example of using the AastraIPPhoneStatus object: abc12345 Server side call forwarding disabled In this example, the AastraIPPhoneStatus object sends the default behavior with the status message (i.e., the status message is added to the scroll list).
Creating an XML Application Execute Commands Object (for executing XML commands) An AastraIPPhoneExecute object on the IP phones allows the phone to execute commands using XML. The phones support the following execute object commands: Reset - This command waits until the phone is idle and then executes a reset. You can use this command in an XML script to enable the server to force phone firmware changes and/or for troubleshooting purposes. • NoOp - This command has no affect on the IP phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Using the Reset Command The tag can be entered with the command the phone should execute. Upon receiving an AastraIPPhoneExecute object, the phone begins executing the URL or URI specified.
Creating an XML Application Using the FastReboot Command Using an XML post, the FastReboot feature forces a phone to reboot in the idle state. It does not check for new firmware and only downloads language packs if there is a change in the supported filenames of the language packs. The phone DOES do a DHCP lookup on every “fast reboot”. It also only downloads the Directory files if the names have changed.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application The command for LED control is sent using the XML HTTP post from one of the XML push server lists. The following example shows an XML LED command in an AastraIPPhoneExecute script. topsoftkey20=on”/> softkey1=off”/> prgkey2=fastflash”/> expmod2 key20=slowflash”/> t1 Notes: 1.
Creating an XML Application Example 3: Phone is getting booted. Startup Action URI is called. Server responses with: The phone gets unlocked and the second URL gets loaded. t1 Using RTP and Multicast RTP Commands ra f The IP Phones have RTP and Multicast RTP XML commands that an Administrator can use with the “AastraIPPhoneExecute” object.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application RTPRx The RTPRx URI instructs the phone to receive a Unicast RTP stream or stop receiving Unicast or Multicast RTP streams. The RTPRx formats to use with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI are: • RTPRx:i:p:v • RTPRx:Stop Where i Specifies the IP Address from which the stream is coming. p Specifies the UDP port on which to receive the RTP stream. Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
Creating an XML Application Note: Once the RTPRx command in the URI is sent to the phone, it stops the phone from listening to any previous RTPRx or RTPMRx commands. The phone starts listening based on the most recent RTPRx command received. This behavior also applies to the RTPRx:Stop and RTPMRx:Stop commands as well but does not enable any further listening.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application RTPMRx The RTPMRx URI instructs the phone to receive a Multicast RTP stream. The RTPMRx format to use with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI is: • RTPMRx:i:p:v Where i Specifies the multicast IP Address from which to receive an RTP stream. p Specifies the UDP port on which to receive the RTP stream. Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100.
Creating an XML Application RTPMTx The RTPMTx URI instructs the phone to transmit a Multicast RTP stream. The RTPMTx format to use with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the URI is: • RTPMTx:i:p Where i Specifies the Multicast IP Address to which an RTP stream is transmitted. p Specifies the UDP port on which to transmit the RTP stream. Ensure that this is a number greater than 3100. Example: This example sends a multicast RTP stream to 239.0.1.20 from UDP port 21000.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Using RTP Recording and Simultaneous Playing (not supported on 6751i) The IP Phones allow for RTP recording and simultaneous playing of an audio file via XML Execute commands. An Administrator can use the RTP and multicast RTP commands (RTPTx, RTPRx, RTPMTx, RTPMRx) with the “AastraIPPhoneExecute” object to initiate this feature.
Creating an XML Application The following scenarios assume that a request for sending mixed RTP is initiated. Action When RTP Transmitting Phone is in idle state. The phone initiates a new RTP session on the paging line and the paging line displays. There is an existing voice call on the phone. The phone starts sending the mixed RTP stream, paging line does not display. The phone is in conference. The request for sending RTP is declined.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Receiving RTP When a phone receives a request for receiving RTP: • if there is an existing audio path, (handset, headset, or speakerphone), the phone uses it to play the incoming RTP stream on top of the existing one. • if the phone is already in a 3-way conference, the request is declined.
Creating an XML Application Examples The following are examples of using the “mix” and “disableIcon” execute commands with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object. These commands apply to both the RTP and multicast RTP XML commands (RTPTx, RTPRx, RTPMTx, RTPMRx). • Send mix unicast RTP stream (if there is existing voice call) to 10.30.100.20:21000. Mix icon is displayed on the phone’s call screen. PAGE 1132IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Using Commands for Playing a WAV File The IP Phones allow a WAV file to be played or stopped via XML Execute commands. A WAV file is an audio file format standard for storing an audio bit stream on a system in raw, uncompressed format or compressed format to reduce the file size. A WAV file can be streamed to the phone using the HTTP protocol.
Creating an XML Application XML Command: Wav.Play The Wav.Play XML Execute command starts the streaming of a WAV file. You enter this command with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object in the following format: Wav.Play:http://[username[:password]@][/]/ The following are examples of using the wav.play command with the XML Execute object. Examples PAGE 1134IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application The 9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i, and 6757i CT screens display the following during WAV streaming. Streaming 00:10 To abort the WAV streaming, a user can press any of the following: Goodbye key • Drop softkey • Line key (not applicable to the 6751i) t1 • D ra f You can also place the handset (if in use) on hook. F-58 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Creating an XML Application Using Commands to Reset Local Data on the Phone The phones allow XML commands that you can use to delete and reset the phone’s directory, callers list, redial list, and the local.cfg file. You use these commands with the AastraIPPhoneExecute object. The following table identifies the XML commands to reset data on the phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML URI for Key Press Simulation The phones provide a feature that allow an XML Developer or Administrator to define XML Key URIs that can send key press events to the phone, just as if the physical hard key, softkey, or programmable key were pressed on the phone. When the Key URI event is sent from the server to the phone, the phone initiates the event as if the key was physically pressed.
Creating an XML Application XML Key URI Description Expansion Module Keys Key:ExpMod1SoftKey1 to Key:ExpMod1SoftKey60 Expansion module 1 softkeys 1 to 60 Note: The phone ignores URI expansion module key events if the keys are not physically present on the expansion module.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Key URI Description Key:Directory Directory Key Key:Options Options Key Key:Save Save Key Key:Delete Delete Key Key:Swap Swap Key Key:Goodbye GoodBye Key Navigation Keys Navigation Up Key Key:NavDwn Navigation Down Key Key:NavLeft Navigation Left Key Key:NavRight Navigation Right Key t1 Key:NavUp Function Keys (only if physically configured on the phone or expansion module) KeyPark Park Softkey Pickup Softkey ra f KeyPi
Creating an XML Application For XML Key Scripts Example: Key: Line1 D ra f t1 Key: Line1 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Dynamic Configuration Object (to push a configuration to the phone) The IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to make configuration changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the phone. This feature involves creating XML scripts that push the changed configuration parameter(s) from the server to the IP phones.
Creating an XML Application Note: You can add more configuration items as applicable. There is a limit of 5000 bytes (less than 5k) on the size of XML configuration objects.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application SetType Attribute Used with Configuration Object The IP phones include an attribute, “setType”, to be used with the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration XML object. The AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object allows you to make configuration changes to the phone that take affect immediately, without having to reboot the phone.
Creating an XML Application Notes: 1. If you enter a value for the “setType” attribute in the root tag of the AastraIPPhoneConfiguration object, the setting affects all of the configuration parameters and their sub-elements. 2. If you enter a value for the “setType” attribute for a single configuration item, the setting affects on that configuration item and its sub-elements.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Local Setting Example The following is an example of using the setType=”local” setting for a specific configuration item (softkey1 label). softkey1 label Test RESULT: The value of "softkey1 label" is set to "Test". This value persists through reboots of the phone.
Creating an XML Application Example of Using Multiple “setType” Values The following is an example of using multiple “setType” values for mutitple configuration items (softkey1, softkey2).
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Image Objects (9480i, 9480i CT, 6755i, 6757i/6757i CT only) The 9480i/9480i CT, 6755i, and 6757i/6757i CT IP phones provide an XML feature that allows you to load images in XML applications that display to the LCD screen.
Creating an XML Application You can include images with an XML object in two ways: • Using pixel data stored with specified tags • Using an internal bitmap loaded via a specified URI Note: The actual resolution of the image on the LCD screen is dependent on the phone model. The 6755i screen has a resolution of 144 x 75 pixels. The 6757i/6757i CT screens have a resolution of 144 x 128 pixels. However, the display of the image is limited to 40 x 144 pixels high.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Example: The XML script for the AastraIPPhoneImageScreen object is as follows: FF00F800FF00FFFFFFFFFFFF00FF00FF00FFF8F200 D ra f XML Screen Example
Creating an XML Application AastraIPPhoneImageMenu The AastraIPPhoneImageMenu object allows you to use a bitmap image to display as a menu. Each menu item is linked to a keypad key (0-9, *, #). You can use this type of image object when you want to display menu choices as a non-ASCII character set or with pictures only.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Each URI is appended to the “base” URI if one exists. The default softkey is a “Done” key at the bottom right position. It is a parse error if two URIs specify the same index. Note: This object supports the destroyOnExit attribute. XML Screen Example: Done D ra f t1 This entire box is a bitmap image. Press 0 - Company Info Press 1 - Stock Market Press # - Weather F-74 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
Creating an XML Application AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) The AastraIPPhoneTextMenu (Icon Menu) object is identical to the “Text Menu Object (Menu Screens)” described on page F-6, except a small icon image appears after the menu number and before the text item. The Text Menu object allows application developers to create a numerical list of menu items on the IP phones.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Screen Example: IconMenu 1. Voicemail 2. Horoscope Select Using the t1 Done D ra f You can incorporate the use of an attribute in the XML script to define the images you will use with the AastraIPPhoneTextMenu object. After you define the icons in the , you can then call those icons as you need them throughout the script. This also allows you to assign the icons to softkeys on the phone.
Creating an XML Application Note: For a list of icons that are internal to the IP phone when specifying the “Icon:”, see the section “IP Phone Internal Icon Images” on page F-78. You can use one or both ways to load images within the same XML script. The softkey icons display at the edge of the screen. Any XML object that supports softkeys can support the optional tag.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application XML Screen Example: DirectoryList Welcometothe Directory ArrowRight Icon Exit Icon Listing t1 Exit IP Phone Internal Icon Images Displays this: D URI Name ra f The IP phones have internal icon images you can use when specifying the “Icon:” attribute in the . The following table lists the internal icons you can specify.
Creating an XML Application URI Name Displays this: ArrowUp ArrowDown ArrowsUpandDown FilledCircle EmptyCircle Envelope t1 Prohibit Ellipse ra f Square TailArrowUp D TailArrowDown 41-001160-03, Rev 00, Release 2.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application Attributes/Options to Use with XML Objects Beep Attribute (configurable via XML objects, config files, or Aastra Web UI) You can enable or disable a “Beep”option to indicate a status on the phone using the Status Message object (AastraIPPhoneStatus), the configuration files, or the Aastra Web UI.
Creating an XML Application Timeout Attribute (configurable via XML objects only) The XML “Timeout” attribute allows you to specify a timeout value for the LCD screen display. You must use the “Timeout” aattribute in the ROOT. When the phone receives an XML object with this attribute, it overrides the default 45 second timeout specified for custom applications. Setting the “Timeout” attribute to zero (0) disables this feature.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application LockIn Attribute (configurable via XML objects only) The XML “LockIn” attribute allows you to specify whether or not the information on the LCD screen stays displayed when other events occur (such as pressing buttons on the keypad). Note: This attribute is ignored during incoming calls. If this attribute is set, and the phone receives an incoming call, the LCD screen exits the XML information and displays the information about the incoming call.
Creating an XML Application CancelAction Attribute (configurable via XML objects only) The XML “cancelAction” attribute allows you to specify a URI that a GET is executed on when the user presses the default CANCEL key. Note: The URI must be fully qualified. You can add this optional feature at the end of any of the XML objects.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application HTTP Post In addition to initiating a request to an XML application from the Services menu, an HTTP server can push an XML object to the phone via HTTP Post. The phone parses this object immediately upon receipt and displays the information to the screen. The HTTP post packet must contain an "xml=" line in the message body. The string to parse is located after the equals sign in the message.
Creating an XML Application Example 2: Below is a sample php source code which sends an XML object to an Aastra phone.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application HTTP Refresh Header You can use an HTTP refresh header with the XML screen objects on the IP phones. This feature provides the following: • All current XML screen objects have the ability to be refreshed by adding a Refresh and URL setting to the HTTP headers. (see Refresh setting format below) • The Refresh setting is set by the XML application and it is up to the application to decide which objects it wants to refresh.
Creating an XML Application HTTP Language Header You can use an HTTP language header with the XML screen objects on the IP phones. By including the language information in the HTTP header, the HTTP GET includes the phone model, the firmware and the MAC address of the phone. When the user selects a language on the phone, the selected language is sent to the XML application and the application displays to the screen in that language.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Creating an XML Application D ra f t1
Creating an XML Application t1
IP Phone Administrator Guide Managing XML Applications Managing XML Applications Description This section provides information on managing XML applications on the Aastra IP Phones. Support of Virtual Web Servers t1 The IP phones support the configuration of a web sever to host multiple websites with different content. With this feature, the webserver looks at the Host header in the incoming HTTP request sent by the browser to determine which website the phone is trying to access.
Managing XML Applications XML SIP Notify In order for an XML push to bypass the NAT/firewall, the phone supports a proprietary SIP NOTIFY event (aastra-xml) with or without XML content. If XML content is provided in the SIP NOTIFY, it is processed directly by the phone as it is done for an XML PUSH. If the content is empty in the SIP NOTIFY, the phone automatically triggers a new pre-configured action uri (action uri xml sip notify). Example of a SIP NOTIFY with XML Content D ra f t1 NOTIFY sip:200@10.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Managing XML Applications Example of a SIP NOTIFY without XML Content t1 NOTIFY sip:200@10.30.100.103:5060 SIP/2.0 Via: SIP/2.0/UDP 10.30.100.103:5060;branch=z9hG4bK7bbc1fac;rport From: ;tag=81be2861f3 To: Jacky200 Contact:
Limited Warranty ra f t1 If replacement parts are used in making repairs, these parts may be refurbished, or may contain refurbished materials. If it is necessary to replace the telephone set, it may be replaced with a refurbished telephone of the same design and color.
IP Phone Administrator Guide Limited Warranty Warranty Repair Services Should the set fail during the warranty period: In North America, please call 1-800-574-1611 for further information. Outside North America, contact your sales representative for return instructions. You will be responsible for shipping charges, if any. When you return this telephone for warranty service, you must present proof of purchase. After Warranty Service t1 Aastra Telecom offers ongoing repair and support for this product.
Index Index auto-answer, delay before 5-103 B backlight mode (6755i, 6757i, 6757i CT) A-63 barge in 5-104, A-178 Basic Preferences 3-19 Basic settings Call Forward Mode 3-23 call waiting 3-20 digit timeout 3-19 display dtmf digits 3-20 DND key mode 3-22 goodbye key cancels incoming call 3-22 incoming call interrupts dialing 3-21 LLDP ELIN 3-23 local dial plan 3-19 MWI Line 3-22 park call (sprecode) (global setting) 3-20 pickup parked call (pickupsprecode global setting) 3-20 play call waiting tone 3-21 pr
mapping as speeddial 5-114 blacklist duration 6-22 Conference softkey 1-26, 1-30 BLF configuring 5-173 directed call pickup 5-129 on Asterisk 5-172 on BroadSoft 5-172 overview 5-169 setting 5-169 subscription period 5-176 subscription period, configuring 5-176, 5-198 conferencing, SIP Join feature 5-363 BLF key 5-147 BLF List,setting 5-170 BLF subscription period 5-176 BLF/List key 5-148 BLF/Xfer key 5-150, 5-178 ra f C cadence settings, Bellcore A-160 cadences, configuring 5-126 call forward key 5-1
DHCP config option override (configuration files) 3-42 dhcp user class 3-42 DSCP 3-51, 4-56 DTMF digits configuring display of 5-65, 5-68 displaying 5-65 DTMF methods 4-97 DTMF playback, configuring suppression for 5-63 DTMF, out-of-band 4-96 dial plan configuring 5-57 DTMF, suppressing playback 5-63 dial plan, emergency 5-16 E dial plan, emergency dial plan and pattern matching 5-17 dial plans overview 5-53 Early-Only parameter in Replaces Header 6-52 emergency dial plan, defining 5-16 empty key 5-1
incoming calls 5-103 outgoing calls 5-102 General Preferences 3-19 Intercom key 1-30 Goodbye Key canceling incoming call using 5-85 intercom settings, incoming allow barge in 3-24 auto-answer 3-24 microphone mute 3-24 play warning tone 3-24 goodbye key 1-7 Group Call Pickup (GCP) key 5-148 GRUU support 6-45 intercom settings, outgoing line 3-25 prefix code 3-25 type 3-25 H handsfree key 1-8 intercom warning tone A-178 hold key 1-7 IP phone UI 2-2 hostname 3-40 HTTP and HTTPS support 2-6 K HTTP
specifying using the Aastra Web UI 5-46 specifying using the configuration files 5-44 specifying using the IP Phone UI 5-44 NAT configuring 4-32 configuring NAT address and port 4-35 Nortel Networks 4-32 overview 4-30 router configuration 4-31 lcr key 5-150 line key 5-147, 5-159 line settings 3-71 NAT IP 3-44 line/call appearance keys 1-8 NAT RTP port 3-45 LLDP 3-43 navigation keys 1-7 lldp packet interval 3-43 network configuration 4-4 LLDP-MED and ELIN 5-97 network parameters A-8 lockIn, for x
Nortel NAT timer 3-45 Nortel Proxy 4-31 NTP time servers 3-46 O operational features 5-5 operational features, advanced 6-3 configuring line number 6-5 configuring MAC address 6-5 configuring message sequence for blind transfer 6-7 options key 1-8 Options key redirection 5-353 options menu, simplified A-7 ra f out of sequence errors, ignoring 6-51 P paging configuring group RTP settings 5-109 group RTP setting description 5-107 Paging key 5-153 paging RTP paging listen addresses 3-26 parameters 6755
park key 5-150, 5-160 park/pickup about parked/pickup calls 5-59, 5-234 configuring a static configuration 5-61 configuring programmable configuration using config files 5-236 configuring programmable configuration using Web UI 5-238 programmable configuration of 5-234 static configuration of 5-59 using on the IP phone 5-243 pass-thru port 3-40 password, resetting user’s 5-7 passwords for a user 5-5 for an administrator 5-9 PC Port 3-40 t1 phone lock key 5-152 D ra f Phone Status Firmware Version 3-10
save key 1-8, 1-22 public key 5-161 Q screen timeout, for XML 5-313 QoS 4-54 scroll delay 5-313 scrolling, status message G-80 R Services key 1-25, 1-30 services key 5-152 Reason Header field in SIP message 6-52 silence suppression 4-98 redial key 1-7 enabling/disabling 5-113 mapping as speeddial 5-114 SIP advanced settings 4-84 configuring 4-76 overview of 4-70 parameter precedence 4-73 repair 0-2 requirements, IP phone 1-34 SIP settings autodial number 3-70 autodial timeout 3-70 autodial, use
configuring in configuration files and Web UI 5-315 display name 3-56 line mode 3-57 password 3-57 phone number 3-56 screen name 3-56 screen name 2 3-56 user name 3-56 subnet mask 3-39 switch focus to ringing line 5-79 SIP settings, network backup proxy port 3-58 backup proxy server 3-58 backup registrar port 3-60 backup registrar server 3-60 outbound proxy port 3-59 outbound proxy server 3-59 proxy port 3-58 proxy server 3-58 registrar port 3-59 registrar server 3-59 registration period 3-60 T time and
volume key 1-7 Tx/Rx adjustments about 5-357 configuring 5-358 W type of service RTCP 3-51 RTP 3-51 SIP 3-51 warranty exclusions 0-1 warranty 0-1 WebApps key 5-149 whilte list proxy 6-24 X U xfer key 5-152, 5-160 upgrading, firmware 8-2 Xfer key, enabling/disabling 5-113 upnp gateway 3-44 upnp manager 3-44 User Guide, for IP phone 1-xviii ra f usernames administrator 2-11, 3-6, 4-3 configuring for FTP server 4-114 configuring for SIP authentication 4-78 for FTP A-22 for SIP authentication 4-71,
Index scroll delay for status messages 5-316 SetType attribute used with object G-66 SIP Notify events 5-339 softkey URIs 5-345 special character softkeys G-28 status message beep 5-315 text wrapping G-12 time and date formats G-31 turning off automatic numbering G-8 URI for key press simulation G-60 using bullets in menu items G-10 using customized services 5-323 using execute commands G-43 WebApps key 5-351 XML schema file G-87 xml beep support 5-72, 5-74 XML Get timeout 5-313 t1 XML key 5-149 D ra f
D ra f t1 Index Index-12 41-001160-00, Release 2.
t1 ra f D
t1 ra f SIP IP Phone Administrator Guide D Models 9143i, 9480i, 9480i CT, and 675xi Series © 2008 Aastra Telecom Inc. If you’ve read this owner’s manual and consulted the Troubleshooting section and still have problems, please visit our website at www.aastratelecom.com or call 1-800-574-1611 for technical assistance. 41-001160-03, Rev 00 Release 2.
